JP2020192029A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of a game.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, an advantageous section in which a pressing order reporting for reporting an operation order of stop switches 42-44 may be generated, and a normal section in which no pressing order reporting is generated, are set. In an advantageous section shift, on the basis of an AT counter which is acquired in advance and a lottery result of each game, a shift lottery to the AT mode in which the pressing order reporting is easily generated, is performed. There are lottery modes having different winning probabilities of the AT mode shift lottery, shift of the lottery mode is performed regardless of a number of bets, and the AT counter which is acquired in advance is updated in a 3-bet game, on the other hand, the AT counter is not updated in a 2-bet game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies,
A starting operation means for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means that can grant a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result,
It is a game machine equipped with
Specific information acquisition means for acquiring specific information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
A specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means, and a specific information storage means.
A specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery as to whether or not a specific event is caused by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means.
Based on the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being the specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means for causing the specific event and the specific execution means.
With
The lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and the corresponding information as the specific information in which the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery is associated with the special result is different. 1 specific state and 2 specific state are set,
The state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state is a limitation in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted and the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. It is characterized in that it is set so that it can occur in any of the games.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a main control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 2 bets. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation effect processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery opportunity determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery mode notification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying the lottery opportunity. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special notification. It is a figure which shows an example of the special notification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by the auxiliary display part and a reel effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery opportunity of the AT mode transition lottery and the transition of a lottery mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st process of notification for BB. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd process of notification for BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery opportunity of the AT mode transition lottery and the transition of a lottery mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery opportunity of the AT mode transition lottery and the transition of a lottery mode. In the first modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous section transition game, and (b) is the flowchart showing the processing for table notification. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode transition table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. In the second modification, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given, (b) is a diagram showing a part of the lottery table for the BB state, and (c1) is the lottery result. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the correspondence processing, and (c2) is the flowchart which shows a part of the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the trigger adjustment process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the AT lottery mode notification process. In the third modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the process for the advantageous section transition game, and (b) is the flowchart showing the lottery opportunity determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the special notification processing in the modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the special notification lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery mode notification. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the random number acquisition processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the information storage area for lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random number shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the process for the advantageous section transition game, and (b) is the flowchart showing the lottery opportunity determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode transition table. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is a flowchart which shows the process for hold display. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the hold display. It is a flowchart which shows the process for hold shift. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the hold display. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the hold display. (A) is a flowchart showing the AT lottery mode notification process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification restriction process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying the lottery opportunity. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a second mode notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a prediction notification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a lottery mode and an AT counter. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a lottery mode and an AT counter. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table in the modification 1. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process, and (b) is for explaining the relationship between the transition of the lottery mode in various situations and the execution of the various random number processes. It is a figure.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by nailing a so-called island facility at the time of installation in the game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured so that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving the stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 shifts the angular positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main control device 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th on the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the visible symbols. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops at the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops at the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set and the symbols are stopped on the activated line, that is, the valid line in a predetermined combination, As a result of winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals as a game medium is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started, and these three or two medals are bet. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bending line L6 is set as an effective line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as an effective line. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following, a game started with three medals bet is a three-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination prize corresponding to the bell has been established.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination is won. If the second small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above-mentioned first small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also possible to understand that is established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small It will be a winning role. If the third small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11C, when the symbols corresponding to the third small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines in which the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fourth small winning combination is won. If the fourth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11D, when the symbols corresponding to the fourth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the “bell” symbols are aligned and stopped on the upward-sloping line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination to third small winning combination winning It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth small winning combination is won. If the fifth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines in which the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 4th small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the sixth small winning combination is won. If the sixth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is placed on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R, respectively. Stops (stops in a mound shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the stop position of the "bell" symbol, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 5th small winning combination It is also possible to understand that a small role prize different from that is established.

Left reel 32L "bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, right reel 32R "white 7" symbol, "white shell" If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the 7th small winning combination will be awarded. If the 7th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the “watermelon” symbols are aligned and stopped on the downward-sloping line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth small winning combination is won. If the 8th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbols corresponding to the eighth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and due to the difference in the line where the "watermelon" symbols are aligned, the small winning combination is different from the above 7th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that is established.

The 9th to 32nd small roles are mainly so-called missing roles in which a prize is established when the 1st to 6th small roles are missed. When the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "white clam" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. Designs and medium reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "Akakai" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " "Bell" or "white clam" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "water clam" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are all stopped with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no small winning combination, and it is easy to understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

By the way, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned first small winning combination to 32nd small winning combination, the paid out small winning combination is a kind of privilege given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

There are 1st re-game prize to 12th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be performed without inserting a medal is given. As shown in FIG. 10, prize-winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. When the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the "BAR" symbols are aligned on the upward-sloping line L5 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (b). As described above, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are stopped in order from the left on the upward-sloping line L5. When the second re-game prize is established, a privilege advantageous to the player may be given.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Akakai" symbol or the "youth" symbol, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. If you stop at the top, you will win a prize. When the symbol corresponding to the third re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the "white 7" symbol is aligned on the lower line L3 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (d). As such, the "Red 7" symbol is aligned on the downward-sloping line L4 and stops. When the third re-game prize is established, a privilege advantageous to the player may be given.

The fourth re-game and the fifth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The sixth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12D, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

In the 7th replay, the left reel 32L "bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "ark shell" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while the middle The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The eighth replay is the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "Akakai" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. And, the prize is established when stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the symbols corresponding to the 8th re-game winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 13B, when the symbol corresponding to the 9th re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle stage replay tempai is stopped.

In the 10th replay, the left reel 32L "BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 12th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game prize or the 12th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, a "cherry" symbol is displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 10th re-game or the 12th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and stop the operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 10th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 12th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game prize and the 12th re-game prize. In the eleventh re-game, a prize is established when the tenth re-game and the twelfth re-game cannot be won, that is, when a omission may occur.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the game state is performed.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for medal payout (not shown), and pays out the medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent medals exceeding a predetermined amount from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored at a height higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. Is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the specified number of games is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number of cards is set to 2 and the specified number of cards is set to 2, two cards are inserted on condition that there are credits. When the virtual medal is inserted and the specified number of medals is set to 3 or 2, and the specific number is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, The first case where three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there is a credit, the specified number is set as three or two, and the specific number is set as two. When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on condition that there are credits. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch in order to insert one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operation surface operated by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operability than the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by inserting a set specific number of the specified number of sheets.

An effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided, which includes a section indicator for changing the winning rate of the small winning combination and indicating an advantageous section which is a section in which the game can proceed in a situation advantageous to the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

In the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, a model name of the game machine is described, and a lower display unit 69 constituting a predetermined display screen is provided. There is. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation button for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by the hall manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is a main control device so that it can be seen from the front of the game machine by opening the front door 12, and cannot be seen from the front of the game machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45, and medals paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the settlement switch 59. Settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volt, for example. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit Display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, payout number display unit 62, instruction monitor 68, role ratio monitor 77, display control device 81, external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to hall management devices (not shown), etc. It is connected via the output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main base that controls and manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the outline of the power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the number. In step S108, a timer update process is performed in which the values of each counter and timer are subtracted / added. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command described later to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68 to perform the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As the game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, when a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when a re-game prize is established in a 2-bet game, two medals are automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached the specified number. In the slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number of sheets in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified number of sheets in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, the affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and the condition that the number of bets is "2" or "3" except in the bonus state. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in the game state other than the bonus state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "1" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side in step S206. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes a process for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied and notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64 And the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated while a predetermined number of medals are bet, so that the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211 and the medal payout process of step S212 are executed in this order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is selected. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. Then, in the normal game state, since the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state is the lottery table in the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the flag for the gaming state set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state Select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus status flags is set in the status information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and it is for the normal gaming state. Select a lottery table. Then, when the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select a lottery table for normal game states (FIG. 21). Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, the processing related to the setting of the winning probability will be supplementarily described.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process of the RAM 106. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, every time the start lever 41 is operated, "setting 1" → "setting 2" → Update the setting value so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed on, for example, the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is set as the setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is completed. To do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV, 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to the new determination value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the 7th small winning combination winning flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set in step S306. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, in step S306. Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset as one of the conditions that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the first BB and the second BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the winning combination other than the first BB and the second BB is set. If is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is not set. Further, in the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, and the 10th small winning combination Set the winning combination flag and the 13th small winning combination flag.

In addition, a lottery table in a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed at the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the combination is correct is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when the game is played in the 3-bet game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (when IV = 1). The probability of winning is about 1 / 27.3 in setting 1, about 1 / 27.5 in setting 3, and about 1 / 28.3 in setting 6, and the set values are The higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value. It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV = 5) The probability of winning is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. It is set so that the chance eye B is easier to win than the chance eye C, and the chance eye A is easier to win than the chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107 in setting 1, about 1/104 in setting 3, and about 93.6 in setting 6. It is a fraction, and it is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9). The probability of becoming) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value, and is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. .. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwich bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as the push order bell) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value. Regardless, it is about 18.4 / 1. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other roles (replay, small role, IV = 1 to 1). It is set higher than the winning probability of 24). In the 3-bet game, it is set not to win the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) or the second BB (IV = 26) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the first BB is 0. Then, in the situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase number minus about 1.77).

On the other hand, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 21, that is, when the game is played in the 2-bet game in the normal game state, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 1-9) is determined by playing the game in the above 3-bet game. It is the same probability as the case. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bell (IV = 11-22) is set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 of 257 regardless of the set value, and it is set so that it is harder to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. Has been done. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Further, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV = 25) is set not to be won, while the second BB (IV = 26) is set to be won, and the probability is not related to the set value. It is about 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the second BB is 0. Then, in the situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the two-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the second BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 2-bet game, excluding the increase of the second BB, a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected (net increase number minus about 0.64).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winned when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, the 10th small winning combination winning flag, and the 13th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the ninth small combination, the tenth small combination, and the thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (winned when IV = 23) and the 7th small winning combination flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbol corresponding to the 7th small winning combination winning and the 8th small winning combination winning. Set the stop symbol information so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the first BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the first BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the first BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the second BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the second BB winning is set).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the small winning combination is given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning is established, and the priority is set. .. If the re-game and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the re-game prize is given priority.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, and the 1st BB winning and the 7th small role winning and When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th small winning combination is set, the priority is set so that the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. .. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal Lip A is further won, the 2nd BB winning and the 1st replay are performed. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the second re-game, the third re-game, and the fourth re-game prize is set, priority is given so that each re-game prize is established with priority over the second BB prize. Set the ranking.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize of any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the section display first process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect processing is for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 and the result of the lottery result corresponding process performed in step S310. It is a process. The rotation effect processing will be described in detail later. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. To do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped is stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. Do. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of ~ 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the distance between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by 5 symbols or more, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination.

The 17th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. The 18th small role symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Akakai" symbol and a "Shirakai" symbol. The 21st small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any of the 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol is displayed on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbols having a small number of sliding frames on the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2) which is the 18th small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 reels), which is the 21st small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, but the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th small winning combination, the 17th small winning combination and the 21st small winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the 18th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 18th small winning combination symbol on the medium reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The 18th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbols and the "youth" symbols is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. is there. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper stage, the 18th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper stage, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, the 18th small by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the case where the winning combination may be established, there is also the possibility that the 20th small winning combination may be established by winning the middle forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 20th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 18th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 20th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small winning combination symbol and the 20th small winning combination symbol are the 20th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Cannot be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 20th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 18th small winning combination symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the player has won the middle forward push bell 1 or the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped to win the 18th small winning combination. And even if the stop mode is such that there is a possibility of winning the 20th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for the winning.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the third small winning combination prize.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol, which are the third small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" symbol or the "ark shell" symbol stops in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. To do.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, the first small winning combination is won regardless of the operation timing. When 2 small winning combination, 3rd small winning combination, 4th small winning combination, 5th small winning combination, or 6th small winning combination is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the same. Depending on the operation timing, another small winning combination will be established, or none of the small winning combination will be established and will be missed. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, the first small role prize, the second small role prize, the third small role prize, the fourth small role prize, the fifth small role prize , Or the 6th small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the effective line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, the winning result corresponding processing is performed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding processing, the section display second processing is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game prize to the twelfth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes has been established, the re-game setting process for setting the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when it is determined that the current game mode is the re-game mode, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for medal payout is driven to eject medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not these are the first BB state and the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the first BB state and the second BB state are not set, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated while 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of cards in the game, in a situation where two or three cards are set as the specified number of cards in the game, the second credit insertion switch 57 can be operated. It is permissible to play a two-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the BB prizes has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB prize has been established.

If the first BB prize is established, in step S506, a process of inputting "90" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, when "90" is input to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that has received the first BB start command starts the first BB state. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the above is performed. Further, in the display control device 81, by receiving the first BB start command, it becomes possible to grasp that the first BB state is from the next game, and the speaker 64 and the speaker 64 so that the effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of cards in the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified bet number are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified bet number is set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB prize has not been established is the case where the second BB prize has been established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511 and the process of inputting "90" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game, the first The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the effect for the 2BB state is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to the extent that the player can identify them. Further, the appearance and contents of the production for the first BB state and the production for the second BB state are different to the extent that the player can identify them. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the first BB start command and the second BB start command are received will be described in detail later.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. That is, the specified number of games is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing in the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables are provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. You may. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal lip A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. Normally, the probability of winning Lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about. It is 1 / 5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card combination (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1 / 1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of losing the winning combination is about 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase of about 0.00 plus or minus), and the number of medals does not increase or decrease in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to proceed with the game without reducing the medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transferred in the 3-bet game, the main medal increase is the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in which 13 medals are paid out. In the normal game state, it is a push order bell, and in the first BB state, it is a common bell. Comparing the winning rates of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the winning rate is about 1/19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, a prize is won with a probability of about 1/5.96, and in a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that a prize is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transferred in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal game state, the probability is about 1/9.64. In the 2nd BB state, there is a 1/596 chance of winning a prize, and even in a 2-bet game, the 2nd BB state is more likely to win a prize than the normal game state. It has been set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, since the lottery table that can reduce the medals in each game is adopted, the increase in the number of medals held even if the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are digested will increase. It cannot be expected, and conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will decrease by digesting the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any of the small winning combination prizes has been established in this game as a result of the lottery processing by the BB state lottery table and the control of each reel. If the prize is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counters of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S516. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter becomes 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, when the common bell is won and the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established, 13 cards are paid out. Therefore, in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that the value is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, the process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, the BB end command corresponding to the BB state that ends this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, the first BB end command is output and set when the first BB state is terminated, and the second BB end command is output and set when the second BB state is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect for ending the first BB and the effect for ending the second BB are performed. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the first BB end command and the second BB end command are received will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and then the bonus state processing ends. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is played. The game will be played at. That is, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to be easily played in the 2-bet game. By the way, after the end of the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so that 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56 and the 2nd credit insertion switch 57. In order to play the betting game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45.

Here, in the slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 26.

The normal gaming state in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set and none of the BBs are won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the game is a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, in the 3-bet game, the 1st BB can be won, but the 2nd BB cannot be won, and in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB can be won, but the 1st BB cannot be won. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, basically, the second BB may be won in the two-bet game.

If the first BB or the second BB is won and no prize is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) is such that the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the game is a 3-bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the first BB is won, the first BB prize can be established in the 3-bet game, while the first BB prize cannot be established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. Further, in the internal state in which the second BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the second BB winning cannot be established in the 3-bet game, while the second BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game. Will be done. That is, if the first BB is won in the 3-bet game, the first BB prize can be established if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, but if the first BB is won and then the 2-bet game is switched to, the first BB prize is won. Cannot be established. In addition, if the second BB is won in the 2-bet game, the second BB prize can be established if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, but if the second BB is won and then the 3-bet game is switched to, the second BB prize is won. Cannot be established. Then, the first BB and the second BB will not be elected in duplicate, and in a situation where the first BB is carried over, the first BB will not be elected again, and the second BB will not be elected in duplicate. In addition, in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the second BB will not be won again, and the first BB will not be won twice. That is, if the game is played in the 2-bet game when the 1st BB is won, the game in the internal state that carries over the 1st BB winning continues endlessly, and if the 2nd BB is won, the game is played in the 3-bet game. Then, the game in the internal state carrying over the second BB winning will continue endlessly.

Here, since the first BB prize is established only in the 3-bet game and the second BB prize is established only in the 2-bet game as described above, 3 in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over. Even if you do not win any of the roles in the betting game, the second BB prize will not be established, and if you lose the result in the two-bet game in the situation where you have carried over the first BB winning. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the winning combination and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the internal state in which the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that the second BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, or the first BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game, the internal state in which the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over is displayed. This is because, when trying to continue, it is necessary to use a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a role that may be missed, it is necessary to win a prize in another role at the time of the loss.

Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role of increasing medals is a common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role of increasing medals in the 2-bet game is the common bell, while the main role of increasing medals in the 3-bet game is the push order bell. .. For the common bell, any of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the prize is established. , The small winning combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. In other words, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game are wider than the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, depending on the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won. Is big. Then, for example, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation order (FIG. 25) from the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game of operating the first credit insertion switch 56, first, the game is played in a 2-bet game in a non-internal state, and the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB is won, the internal state is set, the game is switched to the 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state where the winning second BB prize cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the game in the internal state in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over is not won in the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning. It will be continued.

Hereinafter, assuming a game in which the second BB winning is carried over, the game performance using the notification (pushing order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following explanation) is provided. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The lottery result handling process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and is a process of performing a shift lottery to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of grasping the number of bets of the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is grasped whether or not any of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. Do. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the number of bets is 2. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the first BB and the second BB, and in the internal state after winning the first BB and the second BB, 2 and 3 are set as the specified number of bets, and the first BB state and the second BB are set. In the state, 3 is set as the specified number of bets. The process of step S602 and step S603 is a process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific specified number (specified set number) that is specified (set) in association with the game state. If there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (process for the instruction function) after step S604.

That is, in the non-internal state or the internal state, the processing for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, but the processing for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified number of bets, the 2-bet game is not executed, and the process for the display mode is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the internal state is played in a 2-bet game, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to play the internal state in a 3-bet game and facilitate the normal game in which the second BB is carried over.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding whether or not the push order notification or the like is generated, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is an advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 30, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, as an opportunity for the lottery to shift to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and the latest updated value of the counter is acquired in step S703. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S704, and it is determined in step S705 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so as to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S701 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not a loss result), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, a process of setting the advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S706. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. Here, in the present embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode having different winning probabilities are set as the AT mode, and the first AT mode flag and the second AT mode flag are the AT mode and their types. Is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp, and is a flag set at the time of transition to the AT mode. If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S606, the AT lottery process is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S606, the AT addition process is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, a process of grasping the lottery result of this game is executed. Then, in step S802, the lottery mode of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is grasped by determining whether or not the first mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. That is, in the present embodiment, the first mode and the second mode are set as the lottery modes in which the winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery are different, and the second mode is the AT mode transition lottery than the first mode. It is set to make it easier to win. The above-mentioned first mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is the first mode.

If the first mode flag is set in step S802, the process of acquiring the second mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S803. On the other hand, if the first mode flag is not set in step S802, the process of acquiring the first mode transition lottery table is executed in step S804. The second mode transition lottery table is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery for whether or not to shift from the first mode to the second mode, and the first mode transition lottery table is from the second mode to the first mode. It is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery whether or not to shift to.

As shown in FIG. 30, the second mode transition lottery table and the first mode transition lottery table have a transition rate from the staying mode to another mode (AT lottery mode) according to the lottery result of each game. The probability of winning the transition lottery) is set. As shown in FIG. 30, the triggers for the lottery to shift from the first mode to the second mode are normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, and cherry. A, cherry B, cherry C, and watermelon are set. Then, in the lottery for transition to the second mode, basically, a specific role called a so-called rare role such as chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, and watermelon is played. It is set so that it will be easier to win in the transition lottery that triggers it. For example, in the transition lottery triggered by normal lip A to normal lip C, the probability of winning is 1%, whereas in the transition lottery triggered by cherry A, the probability of winning is set to 10%. .. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, normal lip A, normal lip B, and normal lip C are set as triggers for the lottery for transition from the second mode to the first mode, and the specific role is the first. It is not set as an opportunity for the lottery to shift to one mode.

After acquiring each mode transition lottery table in step S803 or step S804, the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is executed in step S805. Then, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the player has won the AT lottery mode transition lottery. If it is won, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the first mode flag is set.

When the first mode flag is set and the lottery for transition from the first mode to the second mode is won, the process of clearing the first mode flag is executed in step S808. As a result, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery shifts from the first mode to the second mode. Then, in step S809, the process of setting the second mode transition command is executed. The second mode transition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery has shifted from the first mode to the second mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the second mode transition command will be described in detail later.

If the first mode flag is not set in step S807 and the lottery for transition from the second mode to the first mode is won, the process of setting the first mode flag is executed in step S810. As a result, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery shifts from the second mode to the first mode. Then, in step S811, the process of setting the first mode transition command is executed. The first mode transition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery has shifted from the second mode to the first mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the first mode transition command will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S806, or after executing the process of step S809 or step S811, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The lottery trigger flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that a specific trigger for executing the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has occurred. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific opportunity occurs when a predetermined number of games are executed after the transition to the advantageous section occurs, and more specifically, 50 after the transition to the advantageous section occurs. When the game is executed, the lottery opportunity flag is set.

If the lottery trigger flag is not set in step S812, the process of acquiring the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S813. If the lottery opportunity flag is set, it is determined in step S814 whether or not the first mode flag is set, and if the first mode flag is set, various tables are set in step S815. The process of acquiring the first AT mode transition lottery table from the storage area 105a is executed. If the first mode flag is not set, the process of acquiring the second AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S816.

In the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the lottery result of the game. On the other hand, in the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set regardless of the lottery result of the game. More specifically, in the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table, the above-mentioned specific combination is set as a trigger for the AT mode transition lottery, and the lottery result is other than the specific combination such as normal lip A to normal lip C. The AT mode transition lottery is not executed. Further, in the first AT mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of 10% regardless of the game lottery result, and in the second AT mode transition lottery table, 60 regardless of the game lottery result. There is a% chance that the AT mode transition lottery will be won and the AT mode transition lottery will be won when the second AT mode transition lottery table is used than when the first AT mode transition lottery table is used. It is set to be easy.

More specifically about each AT mode transition lottery table, in the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is executed with the specific combination as the trigger as described above, while the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT In the mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is executed regardless of the game lottery result, and the total probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery considering the ratio of the lottery results of each game is the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery. The table is set to be the most difficult to win, and the second AT mode transition lottery table is set to be the easiest to win. However, for example, when the lottery result of the game is Cherry C, although the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table wins with a 100% probability, the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery It is set so that the table may not be won, and depending on the lottery result of the game, it may be easier to win by using the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S813, step S815 or step S816, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S817. Then, in step S818, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S819. After executing the process of step S819, the process of setting the AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S820, and then the AT lottery process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S818 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S821. In step S821, it is determined whether or not the lottery opportunity flag is set, and whether or not the AT mode transition lottery this time is a lottery based on a specific opportunity. In the case of the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity, the process of clearing the lottery opportunity flag is executed in step S822, and the process of setting the opportunity non-winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S823. The trigger non-winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won. After that, in step S824, the process of setting the trigger non-winning command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the AT lottery process ends. The trigger non-winning command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won, and the display control device 81 when the trigger non-winning command is received. The processing on the side will be described in detail later. If the AT mode transition lottery is not based on a specific opportunity in step S821, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is.

<Process for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the AT addition process is a process executed in a situation where any of the AT mode flags is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S901, the lottery result of this game is grasped. Then, in step S902, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode having different additional winning probabilities are set, and the second AT mode is set to have a higher additional winning rate than the first AT mode. There is. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, in the additional lottery table, the additional winning rate is set according to the lottery result of the game and the type of AT mode. For example, the additional lottery triggered by Cherry A is set. In the first AT mode, the additional lottery is won with a probability of 5%, while in the second AT mode, the additional lottery is won with a probability of 10%.

In step S903, the additional lottery is executed, and in step S904, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is not won, the AT addition process is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, the additional game number lottery process is executed in step S905. In the additional game number lottery process, the additional game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of additional games this time is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 32, the number of additional games table is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, the addition is usually performed with Lip A as an opportunity. In that case, an average of 150 games will be added, while an average of 15 games will be added if Cherry A is used as an opportunity. The addition will be performed at an opportunity that makes it difficult to win the additional lottery. The case is set so that the number of additional games is larger.

After executing the number of additional games lottery process in step S905, the process of adding the number of additional games this time to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S906. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the AT mode. After executing the process of step S906, the process of setting the addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S907, and then the AT addition process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the addition command executes a process for performing the addition notification effect corresponding to the addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

<Rotation effect setting process>
In the present embodiment, which AT mode to shift to is determined after the AT mode winning flag is set and before the shift to the AT mode. More specifically, the configuration is determined by the rotation effect processing at the start of reel rotation of the game that has won the AT mode transition lottery. The rotation effect process is a process executed in step S401 in the reel control process (FIG. 22), and is executed after the lottery process (FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 33, in step S1001, the lottery trigger flag or the trigger non-winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game is an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger. If neither flag is set, the main rotation effect process is terminated as it is. If any of the flags is set, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the lottery trigger flag is set, and if it is set, the lottery trigger flag is cleared in step S1003. Then, in step S1004, the AT type determination process is executed. In the AT type determination process, for example, the AT mode type of this time is randomly determined according to the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, and the like. .. In the following step S1005, it is determined whether or not the processing result of step S1004 is the first AT mode. When the current AT mode is determined as the first AT mode, the process of setting the first AT mode flag is executed in step S1006, and the rotation effect for the first AT notification is executed as the current rotation effect in the following step S1007. After setting to do so, the rotation effect processing ends.

As the rotation effect for the first AT notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b1), after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, it corresponds to the first AT as shown in FIG. 47 (b2). As a combination of symbols for the first AT, the "white 7" symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped) at a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. 47 (b4), of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The effect of restarting the rotation is set. The rotation effect for the first AT notification is an effect performed during the invalid period after the game is started and before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective.

When the current AT mode is determined as the second AT mode in step S1005, the process of setting the second AT mode flag is executed in step S1008, and the second AT notification is performed as the current rotation effect in the following step S1009. After setting to execute the rotation effect for use, the rotation effect process ends.

As the rotation effect for the second AT notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b1), after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the second AT is supported as shown in FIG. 47 (b3). As a combination of symbols for the second AT, the "BAR" symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped) at a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. 47 (b4), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated. Is set to resume. The second AT notification rotation effect is an effect performed during the invalid period after the game is started and before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective.

If the lottery trigger flag is not set in step S1002 and the AT mode transition lottery based on this specific trigger is not won, the rotation effect for notification of disengagement is executed as the rotation effect this time in step S1010. After setting to, the rotation effect processing ends.

As the rotation effect for notification of disconnection, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b1), after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the first AT symbol combination of FIG. 47 (b2) and FIG. 47 Without pausing any of the second AT symbol combinations of (b3), for example, after pausing the breaks on a predetermined line (middle line L2), as shown in FIG. 47 (b4). , The effect of restarting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set. The rotation effect for notifying the disconnection is an effect performed during the invalid period before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective after the game is started.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the notification that the AT mode transition lottery is won is executed in the game, the corresponding AT mode flag is set, and the transition to the AT mode occurs. It will be. When the shift to the AT mode occurs, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the push order bell can be notified.

Then, as a rotation effect, at the start of the game, it is notified that the first AT symbol combination is temporarily stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, so that the shift to the first AT mode occurs, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R It is notified that the transition to the second AT mode occurs due to the temporary suspension of the symbol combination for the second AT. In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, for example, by displaying characters such as "AT confirmed" as shown in FIG. 47 (a). The notification mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be different depending on the type of AT mode to be shifted, or may be a common notification mode regardless of the type of AT mode to be shifted.

The notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in the processes of steps S609 to S612 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27). That is, after the AT lottery process and the AT addition process are executed in the process of step S607 or step S608, the push order notification process is executed in steps S609 to S612.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the push order notification process executed in steps S609 to S612, the outline of the push order notification executed on the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Will be described. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the push order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 34A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light the display segment. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since each of the individual light sources irradiates light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, on the instruction monitor 68, at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and "." Can be displayed.

If it is possible to individually display the symbols of a plurality of patterns on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and 7 instead of the eight segments. It may be configured to use 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be composed of a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. In that case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1 The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which the start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that causes a situation in which push order notification can occur is satisfied after shifting to an advantageous section. .. Further, the light is turned off when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during a specific section where the benefit of push order notification is actually obtained, and turns off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is not a specific section even if it is an advantageous section. It serves as a section indicator (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the game machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that the player is suppressed from overlooking because it is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy for the player who advances the game to acquire the medal.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that it is twice as bright as the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when they are in the lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display (more specifically, the illuminance of the surrounding display 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is defined (so that the illuminance is doubled). From such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and oversight when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and the display is larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a number is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), on the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to make the operation desired, and the game can proceed at a good tempo.

The process for notifying the push order in steps S609 to S612 will be described.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If any of the AT mode flags is set, in step S611, it is instructed to perform push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination according to the type of the push order bell this time. Controls the monitor 68. Then, in step S612, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including the information of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination as an output target to the display control device 81. , Ends the push order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this push order notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed.

If the push order bell is not won in step S609, or if any AT mode flag is not set in step S610, the lottery result correspondence process is terminated as it is.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting and ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1101, it is grasped whether or not one of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. Do. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the BB state, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the number of bets is 2. That is, the processes of steps S1101 to S1103 are processes corresponding to the processes of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not the number is one specific specified number associated with the gaming state. It is a process. If the number is not the specified number, the winning result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode processing (processing for the instruction function) after step S1104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 or step S1103 and the number of bets is a specific specified number, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. The case where the AT mode winning flag is set is the case where the AT mode winning flag is set at the start of this game. In this case, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S1105, and then the process of inputting "50" to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1106. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is consumed in the AT mode. That is, while the additional winning rate is different between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, the number of initial games set at the time of transition is common.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1104, or after the process of step S1106 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, it is determined whether or not any AT mode flag is set. If any of the AT mode flags is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter is executed in step S1108. Then, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the AT counter becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, the process of clearing the AT mode flag is executed in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, the process of setting the AT mode end flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The AT mode end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode has ended. After that, in step S1112, the process of setting the AT end command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the winning result is ended. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the AT end command will be described in detail later. If any AT mode flag is not set in step S1107, or if the AT counter is not 0 in step S1109, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, the section display first process and the section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator, shifting to the advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The section display first process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case in which at least a specific section in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S1201 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1204. Then, in step S1205, the process of setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1206, a process is performed to start counting the number of games in the advantageous section, and more specifically, measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e. The advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1207, the processing for the advantageous section transition game is executed. In the advantageous section transition game process, for example, the number of ceiling games in the AT mode is set as the setting of the advantageous section to be transferred this time.

After executing the advantageous section transition game process in step S1207, or when it is determined in step S1202 that the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S1203 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set. If so, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, it is determined whether or not any AT mode flag is set and the display start condition of the section indicator is satisfied. If any of the AT mode flags is set, in step S1209, the section display is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8.

When it is determined in step S1201 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, in step S1210, a process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, in step S1210, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit is performed. That is, the process for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display process.

If it is determined in step S1208 that none of the AT mode flags is set, the process proceeds to step S1211. In step S1211, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Further, after executing the display start processing of the section display in step S1209 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1211 or step S1212, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S1213. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S1214, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1213 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units composed of seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77a to the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and the individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the role ratio monitor 77, and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S1214, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1213 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77a to 77e on the combination monitor 77 display the four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Perform display control. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 such as "0.5012" and up to 4 digits after the decimal point. The numerical value is displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1214, the section display first process is terminated.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing of step S1213, the display control of the combination ratio monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the number of the fifth digit after the decimal point. Further, among the role ratio monitors 77, since "0" is basically displayed on the first display unit 77a, the first display unit 77a may not be provided, or the first display unit 77a may be printed. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (processing for handling winning results) will be performed.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, the process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed in step S1302. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. After executing the process of step S1302, in step S1303, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1303, the number of inserted cards (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts on the condition that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings, and the subtraction result is used as the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. By adding to, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated.

After executing the MY update process in step S1303, the remaining number of games management process is executed in step S1304, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1305. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is there. In the remaining game number management process, for example, whether or not the total of the advantageous section game number AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section) and the AT counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. To figure out. Then, in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the total of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is calculated from the increase / decrease number in the advantageous section. Understand whether there are many situations. Then, in such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1306, a process of setting the advantageous section game command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The advantageous section game command includes the contents of the processing results of steps S1302 to S1305. That is, the advantageous section game command includes information on the number of advantageous section games AG, information on the MY counter, and information on the presence or absence of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the advantageous section game command will be described in detail later.

In the following step S1307, the lottery opportunity determination process is executed. The lottery opportunity determination process is a process for determining whether or not a specific opportunity to execute the AT mode transition lottery has occurred.

<Lottery opportunity judgment processing>
In the lottery opportunity determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, a process of determining whether or not the advantageous section game number AG is a predetermined predetermined number is executed in step S1401. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG is 50. If it is not 50, the lottery opportunity determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 50, the process proceeds to step S1402 and the process of setting the lottery trigger flag is executed. By executing such a process, the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery trigger flag is executed in the lottery result corresponding process of the next game.

In the following step S1403, a process of setting the lottery trigger command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the lottery trigger command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1403, the lottery opportunity determination process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the second section display process, after executing the lottery opportunity determination process in step S1307, whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit number of games 1500 in step S1308, or It is determined whether or not the number of sheets increased / decreased in the advantageous section MY is 2400 or more, which is the upper limit increase number. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S1309, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1310, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1311, after performing the process of initializing the parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second process of displaying this section is terminated.

Regarding the initialization process of the advantageous section information in step S1311, more specifically, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time, and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time. Is a process to return to the initial value. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the various AT mode flags, and the like are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of advantageous section games AG, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in AT mode, and the like are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using push order notification, and RAM is cleared for such variables or parameters. It is a process to perform.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1312 and the AT mode end flag is set. Judge whether or not. If the AT mode end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1309 and the process for ending the advantageous section is executed. If the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the trigger non-winning flag is set. If the trigger non-winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1309 and the process for ending the advantageous section is executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, after shifting to the advantageous section, a shift lottery to the AT mode is performed, and when the shift lottery is won, the shift to the AT mode is performed. Then, when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section also ends with the end of the AT mode. Further, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches 50, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on a specific opportunity, and the advantageous section ends even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

On the other hand, when neither the AT mode end flag nor the trigger non-winning flag is set, the section display second process is terminated as it is without ending the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific specified number of bets set according to the game state are placed in the processing related to the instruction function such as the AT mode transition lottery, the additional lottery, and the mode transition lottery of the AT mode transition lottery. It is executed in the game and is not executed in the game where bets other than the specified number are placed. More specifically, in the first BB state such as the non-internal state and the internal state and the state before the transition to the second BB state, both the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game can be executed, but the specified number is set to 3. Since it is set, in the non-internal state or the internal state, the process related to the instruction function is executed in the 3-bet game, but the process related to the instruction function is not executed in the 2-bet game. On the other hand, in the first BB state and the second BB state, only the 3-bet game can be executed, but since the specific specified number is set to 2, the instruction function is related in the first BB state and the second BB state. No processing is performed. That is, although the processing related to the instruction function is executed in the 3-bet game in the non-internal state or the internal state, the processing related to the instruction function is not executed in the 2-bet game or each BB state in the non-internal state or the internal state.

On the other hand, the specific opportunity that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is defined by the number of advantageous section games AG that is counted regardless of the number of bets and the state, and the number of advantageous section games AG is 50, as described above. By doing so, the lottery opportunity flag is set. More specifically, the number of advantageous section games AG is counted not only by the number of 3-bet games in the non-internal state or the internal state, but also by the number of 2-bet games in the non-internal state or the internal state or the number of games in each BB state. To.

Then, for example, by playing a game in a 2-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, it is possible to set the lottery trigger flag, although the processing related to the instruction function is not performed. In this case, the lottery trigger flag is set. The AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery trigger flag is executed in the first game with the specified number after the setting of. That is, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed in the game in which the 2-bet game is switched to the 3-bet game in the non-internal state or the internal state.

More specifically, as part of the processing related to the instruction function, the transition of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery occurs in the 3-bet game in the non-internal state or the internal state, but in the 2-bet game in the non-internal state or the internal state. In each BB state, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery does not shift. On the other hand, the specific opportunity occurs in 50 games after shifting to the advantageous section regardless of the game state and the number of bets. Therefore, for example, by playing a non-internal state or an internal state in a 3-bet game, the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is executed, and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is shifted from the first mode to the second mode. After the success, it is possible to prevent the AT lottery mode transition lottery process from being executed again by advancing the game in the 2-bet game until a specific opportunity occurs. Then, it becomes possible to generate a specific opportunity while staying in the second mode, and then by switching to the 3-bet game, the AT mode transition lottery using the second AT mode transition lottery table on the high probability side can be performed. It is possible to realize a game such as receiving.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to realize the above-mentioned novel game by utilizing the relationship between the presence / absence of execution of the process related to the instruction function specified by the specified specified number and the specific opportunity that occurs regardless of the specified specified number. It is said. Hereinafter, the production processing for realizing the above game will be described.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. When a new command is received, in step S1502, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501 or after the process of step S1502 is executed, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of the normal process. If it is a bet-time command, the bet-time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current bet operation is executed in step S1504.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, or after the process of step S1504 is executed, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and corresponds to the lottery result in addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process. There are a first mode transition command, a second mode transition command, an AT winning notification command, a trigger non-winning command, an addition command, a push order notification command, etc., which are set in the process (FIG. 27). In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1506.

When a negative determination is made in step S1505, or after the process of step S1506 is executed, it is determined in step S1507 whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the respective stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). It is a stop command command set by. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S1508 executes each stop operation effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1507, or after the process of step S1508 is executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, the first BB start command, the second BB start command, the first BB end command, which are set in the bonus state processing (FIG. 24), the winning result correspondence processing (FIG. 36), and the section display second processing (FIG. 38). There are a second BB end command, an AT end command, an advantageous section game command, a lottery trigger command, and the like. In the case of these commands at the time of all stops, the effect setting process at the time of all stops is executed in step S1510.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, or after the process of step S1510 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1511, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1511, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above-mentioned effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timings. Further, in step S1511, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the main control device 101 is not used. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.) connected to, set for error notification, and so on.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is the push order winning combination (pushing order bell winning) based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. When the push order notification command is received, in step S1603, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Perform the settings.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the lottery result of the current game is not the push order winning combination, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the specific winning combination. As already explained, the specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is hard to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in this embodiment, chance eye A to chance eye C, cherry A to Cherry C and watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 30, even if a specific opportunity does not occur, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed with these lottery results as an opportunity, and as shown in FIG. 33, the AT triggered by these lottery results. In the additional lottery of the mode, it is set so that it is easier to win the additional winning than when the lottery result other than the specific combination is used as an opportunity. If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, the specific combination notification process is executed in step S1605. In the specific combination notification process, a setting is executed so that the specific combination notification that the lottery result of this game is one of the above specific combinations is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. As the specific combination notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), three surprise mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. The production is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602 or step S1604, or after executing the process of step S1603 or step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the addition command is received. When the addition command is received, the addition effect setting process is executed in step S1607. In the setting process of the additional effect, the additional effect of displaying the number of the added games on the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed as a notification corresponding to the addition of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The mode of the addition effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the addition is performed. For example, the number of addition games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the addition is performed. A mode may be included, or for example, a configuration may include a so-called post-addition effect mode in which the addition effect is executed in a situation where the number of remaining games in the AT mode is a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). ..

If a negative determination is made in step S1606, or after the process of step S1607 is executed, the AT lottery mode notification process is executed in step S1608. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery, a first mode in which it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery and a second mode in which it is easier to win than the first mode are set. In the present embodiment, a special notification suggesting whether the user is staying in the first mode or the second mode may be executed, and the AT lottery mode notification process sets the execution condition of the special notification. It is the processing of.

<Process for AT lottery mode notification>
In the AT lottery mode notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the first mode transition command is received as the start command of this time. When the first mode transition command is received, the process of setting the first flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S1702. The first flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the AT lottery mode is the first mode on the low probability side.

When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not a second mode transition command is received as the start command of this time. When the second mode transition command is received, in step S1704, the process of clearing the first flag is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not a trigger non-winning command is received as the start command of this time. As described above, the trigger non-winning command is a command output from the main control device 101 side when a non-winning is achieved in the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger. When the trigger non-winning command is received, in step S1706, a process of adding 1 to the trigger through counter provided in various counter areas 183b is executed. The trigger through counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of consecutive times in which the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won. The process for executing the special notification will be described in detail later, but in the present embodiment, the special notification in the second mode can be executed according to the value of the trigger through counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the process of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the AT winning notification command is received as the start command of this time. When the AT winning notification command is received, the process of clearing the trigger through counter to 0 is executed in step S1708, and then the AT lottery mode notification process is terminated. If the AT winning notification command has not been received in step S1707, the AT lottery mode notification process ends as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time effect setting process, after executing the AT lottery mode notification process in step S1608, the AT winning notification command or the trigger non-winning command is received as the current start command in step S1609. Judge whether or not it is. When the AT winning notification command or the trigger non-winning command is received, it is highly possible that the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger was performed. More specifically, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger or the specific combination It is the case of winning in the AT mode transition lottery based on the winning (AT winning notification command) or the case of not winning in the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity (trigger non-winning command). In the present embodiment, in these cases, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to execute the result notification effect for notifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

In the result notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a battle is performed between the main character and the enemy character, and the main character wins in the battle to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. When the main character is defeated in the battle, it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won. More specifically, when the result notification effect is generated, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), as a start effect in which the battle occurs, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a character such as "Battle start !!" Display the animation of the enemy character. Then, the main character wins through the attack effect shown in FIG. 52 (b1) showing how the main character attacks and the attacked effect shown in FIG. 52 (b2) showing how the enemy character attacks. The result notification effect ends when either the effect (FIG. 52 (c1)) or the defeat effect (FIG. 52 (c2)) in which the main character is defeated is performed. In this case, if the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the result notification effect is the winning result, the winning effect is executed, and if the AT mode transition lottery is the non-winning result, the defeat effect is executed.

When the AT winning notification command or the trigger non-winning command is received in step S1609, the process for executing the above result notification effect is performed in steps S161 to S1613. That is, in step S1610, as the start processing of the result notification effect, the effect setting process for ensuring that the start effect of FIG. 52A is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. More specifically, the effect data for the start effect is acquired from the effect table stored in the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) is used at the timing when the effect based on the effect data corresponds. And the speaker 64) sets the effect data so that it is executed. In this case, in the display control device 81, in the other processing of step S1511 in the effect setting process (FIG. 40), the effect data is read at the corresponding timing, and the corresponding notification is performed so that the effect is performed with the read data. Control the means. By doing so, the effects set in the various effect setting processes can be executed at a desired timing. Since the processing related to these effect setting and effect execution is the same for other effects, the description thereof is basically omitted in the following description.

By the way, when the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on a specific opportunity, as described above, the rotation effect processing (FIG. 33) is set so that the rotation effect during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed. To. In this case, when the result notification effect for the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed, in the above rotation effect, the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not, and the temporary stop corresponding to the type of the AT mode (FIG. 47 (b2)) , Before the occurrence of FIG. 47 (b3) (FIG. 47 (b1)), the victory effect and the defeat effect are set to be performed from the above start effect, and the victory effect on the result notification effect side is set. This is performed, and after a pause corresponding to the type of AT mode on the rotation effect side is performed, the AT winning notification effect of FIG. 47 (a) is performed.

On the other hand, when the result notification effect based on the specific combination is performed, the specific combination notification effect is performed before the result notification effect (step S1605). In this case, for example, the generation timing of each effect may be set so that the result notification effect is performed as a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games, or the specific combination is specified in the winning game. The result notification effect may be started at a timing after the combination notification effect, and the result notification effect may be set to end in the game.

After executing the process of step S1610, in step S1611, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an AT winning notification command, and if it is an AT winning notification command, in step S1612. The effect setting process is executed so that the result notification effect of this time is finally ended as a victory effect. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to select the attack effect than the attack effect.

In step S1611, when the command received this time is not an AT winning notification command but a trigger non-winning command, in step S1613, the result notification effect of this time is finally ended as a defeat effect. Execute the effect setting process. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to select the attacked effect than the attacked effect.

If no command is received in step S1609, or after executing the process of step S1612 or step S1613, the process proceeds to step S1614. In step S1614, the first BB notification process is executed. Such a process is a process for producing a game using the first BB state and the second BB state, and will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1615, other start-time effect setting processes are executed, and then the main start-time effect setting process ends. In step S1615, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, or the like is executed. To do.

<Production setting process when all stops>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of total stop in step S1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. As already explained, the effect setting process at the time of all stops sets the effect when the newly received command is a command at the time of all stops such as a winning result command, an AT end command, an advantageous section game command, and a lottery trigger command. It is a process to be performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, the effect setting for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S1802. For example, as shown in FIG. 48A, the AT end effect displays the number of continuous games in the current AT mode and the number of medals acquired in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the advantageous section game command is received. When the advantageous section game command is received, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode, and when it is not the AT mode, that is, it is an advantageous section and the mode shifts to the AT mode. If it is in the previous state, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, the lottery trigger notification process is executed, and in the following step S1806, the special notification process is executed.

After executing the process of step S1802 or step S1806, if a negative determination is made in step S1803 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, the second BB notification process is executed. Such a process is a process for producing a game using the first BB state and the second BB state, and will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1808, the other all-stop effect setting process is executed, and then the all-stop effect setting process ends. In step S1808, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting of is controlled so as to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Processing for notification of lottery opportunity>
In the lottery trigger notification process of step S1805, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, in step S1901, the effect setting for performing the game number notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. The game number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of games from the transition to the advantageous section to the occurrence of a specific opportunity. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), a game until the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on a specific opportunity by setting the lottery opportunity flag, such as "50 games after chance". The number is notified based on the information of the advantageous section game number AG of the advantageous section game command received this time (in FIG. 49 (a), the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is performed after 50 games. Shows). In this case, for example, as the game in the advantageous section progresses, the number of games notified by the game number notification effect is also subtracted and updated every game (see FIG. 49B). Then, when the number of games until the specific opportunity occurs becomes 0 and the specific opportunity occurs, the number of games notified by the game number notification effect also becomes 0 as shown in FIG. 50 (a) (“Chance”. It will be displayed as "0 games after").

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not the game ending this time is a 3-bet game. In the case of a 3-bet game, step S1903 determines whether or not the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state. When it is determined in step S1902 that the game is not a 3-bet game, or when it is in the first BB state or the second BB state in step S1903, the execution of the processing related to the instruction function is restricted in the restricted state (regulated state, restricted game). ). In this case, in step S1904, the effect setting for performing the mode transition restriction notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. The mode transition restriction notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the above-mentioned restricted state. For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), "HOLD!" Is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. By displaying characters such as "!", It is notified that the restricted state is in effect.

It is determined whether or not the lottery trigger command is received in step S1905 after the negative determination is made in step S1903 and the process of step S1904 is executed. If the lottery trigger command has not been received, the lottery trigger notification process is terminated as it is. When the lottery trigger command is received, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the game ending this time is a 3-bet game. In the case of a 3-bet game, step S1907 determines whether or not the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state.

In the case of a 3-bet game and not in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, the game is played with a specified number of bets in the non-internal state or the internal state, and the execution of the processing related to the instruction function is permitted. It means that it is a permissible state (permissible game). That is, it is a case where the lottery trigger command is received in the permissible state. In this case, in step S1908, the effect setting for performing the lottery notice effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then the process for notifying the lottery opportunity is ended. The lottery notice effect is that the player receives the lottery trigger command in the above-mentioned allowable state, that is, the next game is also executed in the allowable state, so that the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), after displaying the main character on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, a character display such as "Next battle!" Is displayed. Do.

On the other hand, when the lottery trigger command is received and the game is a 2-bet game, or the first BB state or the second BB state, the game is played with a bet other than the specified number. It means that it is in a restricted state in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted. That is, it is a case where the lottery trigger command is received in the restricted state. In this case, in step S1909, the effect setting for performing the standby effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then the process for notifying the lottery opportunity is ended. In the standby effect, the lottery trigger command is received in the above-mentioned restricted state, that is, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed by switching from the restricted state to the allowable state and executing the game after the next game. This is an effect for notifying the player that the game will be played. For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), after displaying the main character on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, "defeat the enemy with MAXBET". It displays characters such as "What !!".

The MAXBET here means the first credit insertion switch 56. As described above, by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the number of bets associated with the MAX bet counter is bet, and more specifically, 2 bets are set in the non-internal state and 3 bets are set in the internal state. Is set, and 3 bets are set in the first BB state and the second BB state. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the game is executed with a bet according to a specific specified number (internal state and each BB state), and the game is not executed with a bet according to a specific specified number (non-). (Internal state).

In this way, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the lottery trigger command is received and a specific trigger occurs (when the lottery trigger flag is set), the lottery notice effect is produced on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. The standby effect is executed. Then, when the next game is executed in the 2-bet game in the situation where these lottery notice effects and standby effects are executed, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is performed in the game executed in the 2-bet game. Not executed. In this case, the standby effect is executed again.

On the other hand, if the next game is executed in a 3-bet game in a situation where the lottery notice effect or the standby effect is being executed, a specific opportunity is provided on condition that the game is not in the first BB state or the second BB state. The AT mode transition lottery based on the above is executed, and the result notification effect (battle effect) based on the AT winning notification command or the trigger non-winning command is executed.

<Processing for special notification>
Next, the special notification process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S2001, the process of grasping the above-mentioned trigger through counter is executed. As described above, the trigger through counter is a counter indicating the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won. In the following step S2002, it is determined whether or not the first flag is set. When the first flag is set and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is the first mode on the low probability side, the process of acquiring the first special notification lottery table from the various table storage areas 182a in step S2003 is performed. Run. Further, when the first flag is not set in step S2002 and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is the second mode on the high probability side, various table storage areas 182a to the second special notification in step S2004. Execute the process to acquire the lottery table. Then, in step S2005, the special notification lottery process using the special notification lottery table acquired in step S2003 or step S2004 is executed. The special notification lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to execute the special notification as a suggestion of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery.

Comparing the first special notification lottery table (FIG. 46 (a)) and the second special notification lottery table (FIG. 46 (b)), the special notification lottery using the second special notification lottery table is better. It is set so that special notification is likely to occur. That is, the special notification is an effect suggesting that the player is staying in the second mode.

Further, in the first special notification lottery table and the second special notification lottery table, the occurrence rate of special notification differs depending on the set value set in the winning probability setting process and the value of the trigger through counter. It is set. More specifically, the higher the set value and the higher the ball output rate, the higher the occurrence rate of special notification even with the same trigger through counter value, and the larger the value of the trigger through counter even with the same set value, the higher the special notification. It is set to have a high incidence.

After executing the special notification lottery process in step S2005, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the special notification lottery has been won. If the special notification lottery has been won, in step S2007, the effect setting for performing the special notification on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then the special notification process ends. If the special notification lottery has not been won, the special notification process is terminated as it is. As the special notification, for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b) and 51 (a), a flame is burned behind the main character in the auxiliary display unit 65, and an effect showing that the spirit of the main character is increasing. Is set.

<Flow of the game>
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 53. Note that FIG. 53 will be described assuming a game in an internal state in which the second BB winning is carried over.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the above internal state is played in a 3-bet game and the game shifts to the advantageous section at the timing of t1 through the advantageous section transition lottery, the number of games until the lottery trigger flag is set, that is, the specific trigger The counting of the number of games until the occurrence of is started. Since the game in the 3-bet game in the internal state is a game with a specific specified number, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed as described above, and the transition to the advantageous section also occurs. In addition, the AT mode transition lottery after the transition to the advantageous section can be executed, and the transition lottery (mode transition lottery) for the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is also executed.

For example, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery shifts to the second mode at the timing of t2, and shifts to the first mode at the timing of t3. However, since these lottery modes affect the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger, even if the mode transition occurs at the timing of t2 or t3 before the specific trigger, the mode information is displayed. The AT mode transition lottery used is not executed. When the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches 50 games at the timing of t4, the lottery opportunity flag is set as a specific opportunity has occurred. Then, in the next game, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed. In the figure, both the game in which the specific opportunity occurs and the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific opportunity are displayed as the timing of t4, but in reality, there is a deviation of one game as described above. Is occurring.

As described above, the transition to the first mode occurs at the timing of t3, and the first mode is maintained until the timing of t4. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity at the timing of t4 is executed in the first mode on the low probability side. If the AT mode transition lottery at the timing of t4 is not won, the advantageous section ends in the game by setting the trigger non-winning flag (second process of section display).

At the timing of t5, the section shifts to the advantageous section, and the counting of the number of games until a specific opportunity occurs is started. When the transition to the second mode occurs at the timing of t6, and the lottery mode is maintained (without transitioning to the first mode) and a specific opportunity occurs at t7, the AT mode is set to the second mode on the high probability side. The transition lottery is executed. If the AT mode transition lottery is won, the display mode shifts to the AT mode, and the AT mode ends at the timing of t8, so that the advantageous section also ends (section display second processing).

In the case of shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t9, if the 3-bet game is switched to the 2-bet game at the timing of t10, the execution of the processing related to the instruction function is restricted in the 2-bet game, so the mode transition lottery is executed. Is also restricted. Then, the first mode before switching to the 2-bet game is maintained.

However, since the counting of the number of games until the specific opportunity occurs is executed regardless of whether or not the number of bets is the specific specified number, the specific opportunity occurs at the timing of t11, which is 50 games after the timing of t9. , The lottery opportunity flag is set. On the other hand, since the AT mode transition lottery is a process related to the instruction function, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not executed in the 2-bet game even if the lottery trigger flag is set. Then, by switching to the 3-bet game at the timing of t12, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed. The AT mode transition lottery at t12 was executed in the first mode on the low probability side, and the figure shows that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, which is advantageous at the timing of t12. The section also ends.

When switching from the 3-bet game to the 2-bet game at the timing of t15 after the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the timing of t13 and the transition from the first mode to the second mode occurs at the timing of t14, the mode is as described above. Execution of the transition lottery is restricted. Therefore, the second mode before switching to the 2-bet game is maintained. As described above, since the counting of the number of games until the specific opportunity occurs is continued even in the 2-bet game, the specific opportunity occurs and the lottery opportunity flag is set at the timing of t16. After that, by switching to the 3-bet game at the timing of t17, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed, and the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the second mode on the high probability side. The figure shows that the AT mode transition lottery was won, and the AT mode is started at the timing of t17.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is provided with the first mode on the low probability side and the second mode on the high probability side, and the transition of the lottery mode and the AT mode transition lottery are a specific specified number. Since it is executed in the game of the number of bets by, and the specific opportunity is configured to occur regardless of whether or not the number of bets is the specific specified number, the specific opportunity is set while maintaining the second mode on the high probability side. It is possible to generate it, and it is possible to realize a novel game playability using such a specific specified number.

In this case, as described above, the player can predict whether the lottery mode is staying in the first mode or the second mode by the occurrence rate of the special notification. That is, since the occurrence rate of the special notification is higher when staying in the second mode than when staying in the first mode, the stay in the second mode is performed while referring to the special notification. It is possible to realize games such as identifying and switching the number of bets.

Moreover, the special notification is more likely to occur as the number of consecutive non-winnings in the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity increases. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is difficult to win, and the so-called ceiling function can be realized only by using the lottery mode notification such as the special notification.

If the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won, the advantageous section can be terminated, and the advantageous section information initialization process is executed at the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on the above specific opportunity is not won is stored in the display control device 81 on the sub side, so that the information for each advantageous section is carried over on the main control device 101 side. It is possible to suitably realize the ceiling function of the AT mode transition lottery while assuming a configuration that does not occur.

Here, for example, when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, whether or not to end the advantageous section according to the maximum number of games (1500 games) in the advantageous section instead of ending the advantageous section each time. The configuration that determines is also conceivable. That is, for example, when the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games at the time when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the non-winning of the AT mode transition lottery is used as an opportunity. On the other hand, if the number of games is less than the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section may be terminated when the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In such a configuration, since the number of consecutive times of non-winning can be managed on the main control device 101 side, it is also possible to realize the ceiling function on the main control device 101 side. In this case, a command corresponding to the number of consecutive times is output to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 manages whether or not the special notification is executed according to the number of consecutive times, or the main control device 101 side determines the number of consecutive times. By determining whether or not to execute the special notification based on the above, and outputting a command to that effect to the display control device 81 when executing the special notification, it is possible to realize the ceiling function according to the occurrence rate of the special notification. is there.

On the other hand, for example, when the set value is changed before the opening of the game hall, the RAM clear process on the main control device 101 side is executed, and the continuous number of times managed on the main control device 101 side is also It will be erased. Then, there is a high possibility that whether or not the set value has been changed can be detected depending on whether or not the ceiling function is activated based on the number of consecutive times. In that respect, as described above, by configuring the display control device 81 side to manage the number of consecutive times, even if the RAM clear process accompanying the change of the set value is executed on the main control device 101 side, the situation is met. It is possible to activate the ceiling function without involvement. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to detect whether or not the set value has been changed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution of the processing related to the instruction function is restricted not only in the 2-bet game in the non-internal state or the internal state but also in the first BB state and the second BB state. That is, it is possible to limit the mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery by not only switching the number of bets in the non-internal state or the internal state but also causing the transition to the first BB state or the second BB state. In particular, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, the reduction of medals per game is suppressed as compared with the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game in the internal state (see FIG. 26), and the game goes to the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state. By shifting, it is possible to execute a game that causes a specific opportunity while limiting the mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery while suppressing the decrease in the number of medals held. Therefore, a process for producing a game using the transition of each BB state and the like will be described below.

<First notification process for BB>
First, the first notification process for BB in the effect setting process at the start will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. As already explained, the first notification process for BB (starting effect setting process) is an effect setting based on the start command (lottery result command, AT winning notification command, trigger non-winning command, etc.) output at the start of the game. It is a process to perform.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the first BB has been won based on the lottery result command received this time. When the first BB is won, the process of setting the first BB winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2102. Then, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the first BB end completed flag or the second BB end completed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. Although the first BB state and the second BB state have already ended for the first BB end flag and the second BB end flag, the CPU 181 grasps that the production corresponding to these first BB state and the second BB state is continuing. It is a flag to do. The processing when these BB end flags are set will be described in detail after the production corresponding to each BB state is explained. Here, none of the BB end flags is set. The processing of the case will be described.

That is, if a negative determination is made in step S2103 and none of the BB end flags are set, the effect setting for performing the first BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2104. .. The first BB winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the first BB has been won in this game. For example, as shown in FIG. 56A, the first BB winning effect is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. It is displayed that the tank as the first BB compatible character associated with 1BB has been acquired (the figure shows how the tank jumps out of the treasure chest).

If it is determined in step S2101 that the first BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, it is determined whether or not the second BB has been won based on the lottery result command received this time. When the second BB is won, the process of setting the second BB winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2106. Then, in step S2107, it is determined whether or not the first BB end completed flag or the second BB end completed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If a negative determination is made in step S2107 and none of the BB end flags are set, the effect setting for performing the second BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2108. The second BB winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the second BB has been won in this game. For example, as shown in FIG. 56B, on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, the second BB winning effect is displayed. It is displayed that the sword as the second BB compatible character associated with the 2BB has been acquired (the figure shows how the sword jumps out of the treasure box).

If it is determined in step S2105 that the second BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2109. In step S2109, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag is set. When the first BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2110, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game. Here, the 1st BB winning flag is a flag that is cleared based on the 1st BB winning, but when the 1st BB winning flag is set and the game is a 3-bet game, the 1st BB winning is carried over. It means that the internal state is executed in the 3-bet game. In this case, in step S2111, the effect setting for performing the first BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. The first BB winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the first BB winning has been carried over and the first BB winning can be established in this game. For example, in FIG. 57 (a). As shown, the tank as the first BB-compatible character is displayed at a predetermined position (left end) on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

If the first BB winning flag is not set in step S2109, it is determined in step S2112 whether or not the second BB winning flag is set. When the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2113, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is a 2-bet game. Here, the second BB winning flag is a flag that is cleared based on the second BB winning, but when the second BB winning flag is set and the game is a two-bet game, the second BB winning is carried over. It means that the internal state is executed in the 2-bet game. In this case, in step S2114, the effect setting for performing the second BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. The second BB winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the second BB winning has been carried over and the situation is such that the second BB winning can be established in this game. For example, in FIG. 57 (b). As shown, the sword as the second BB compatible character is displayed at a predetermined position (left end) on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

<Second notification process for BB>
The process for executing the effect corresponding to the first BB state and the second BB state is executed in the second BB notification process. Therefore, prior to the description of the processing in the BB notification first processing when the production corresponding to each of these BB states is being continued, the BB notification second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. .. As already explained, the second notification process for BB is a process executed in the effect setting process at the time of all stop, and the start command (winning result command, first BB start command, second BB) output at the end of the game. This is a process for setting an effect based on a start command, a first BB end command, a second BB end command, an AT end command, an advantageous section game command, a lottery trigger command, and the like).

In the second BB notification process, it is determined in step S2201 whether or not the first BB start command has been received. When the first BB start command is received, in step S2202, the effect setting for starting the first BB effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then the second BB notification process ends. To do. The first BB effect is an effect for notifying the player that the player is in the first BB state and the execution of the process related to the instruction function is restricted. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a). On the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, the state in which the main character is on the tank is displayed as the first BB character associated with the first BB compatible character. In addition, when executing the first BB effect, a mode transition restriction notification effect of character display such as "HOLD !!" is used to notify that the state is restricted, and a medal reduction suppression effect of character display such as "physical strength is being preserved" is suppressed. By performing the above, it is notified that the medal reduction is suppressed. The first BB effect continues at least until the process for ending the first BB effect is executed. Then, when the number of advantageous section games AG becomes 50 during the first BB state and the lottery trigger command is received, a standby effect is generated as shown in FIG. 59 (a) (step S1909).

If the first BB start command has not been received in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the second BB start command has been received. When the second BB start command is received, in step S2204, the effect setting for starting the second BB effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then the second BB notification process ends. To do. The second BB effect is an effect for notifying the player that the player is in the second BB state and the execution of the process related to the instruction function is restricted. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b). On the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, the state in which the main character is equipped with a sword is displayed as the second BB character associated with the second BB compatible character. In addition, when the second BB effect is executed, a mode transition restriction notification effect for displaying characters such as "HOLD !!" is used to notify that the state is restricted, and a medal reduction suppression effect for displaying characters such as "physical strength is being preserved" is suppressed. By performing the above, it is notified that the medal reduction is suppressed. The second BB effect continues at least until the process for ending the second BB effect is executed. Then, when the number of advantageous section games AG becomes 50 during the second BB state and the lottery trigger command is received, a standby effect is generated as shown in FIG. 59 (b) (step S1909).

If it is determined in step S2203 that the second BB start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the first BB end command has been received. When the first BB end command is received, the process of setting the first BB end flag is executed in step S2206. Then, in step S2207, after executing the process of inputting "3" as the first predetermined number into the counters provided in the various counter areas 183b after the end, the second process of the notification for BB is ended. In the present embodiment, the first BB effect and the second BB effect are continued until the game after the corresponding BB end game, and the after-end counter sets the running BB effect after the BB end game. It is a counter that specifies the maximum number of games that can be continued even if there is one.

If it is determined in step S2205 that the first BB end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2208 whether or not the second BB end command has been received. When the second BB end command is received, the process of setting the second BB end completion flag is executed in step S2209. Then, after the process of inputting "5" as the second predetermined number to the counter is executed after the end in step S2210, the second process of the notification for BB is ended. In the present embodiment, the second predetermined number is a number different from the first predetermined number and is larger than the first predetermined number, but it may be smaller than the first predetermined number. 1 It may be the same number as a predetermined number. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the second BB notification process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the first BB notification process, if the first BB is won in step S2101 and it is determined in step S2103 that the first BB end flag and the second BB end flag are set, step S2115 move on. In step S2115, the end processing of the BB effect being executed is executed. That is, if the first BB effect is being executed, the first BB effect is ended, and if the second BB effect is being executed, the second BB effect is ended. At the end processing of the BB effect, the counter is also reset to 0 after the end. That is, each BB effect can be continued until the next first BB winning after the end of the BB state.

If the second BB is won in step S2105 and it is determined in step S2107 that the first BB end flag and the second BB end flag are set, the process proceeds to step S2116. In step S2116, the end processing of the BB effect being executed is executed in the same manner as in step S2115. That is, if the first BB effect is being executed, the first BB effect is ended, and if the second BB effect is being executed, the second BB effect is ended. At the end processing of the BB effect, the counter is also reset to 0 after the end. That is, each BB effect can be continued until the next second BB winning after the end of the BB state.

After executing any of the processes of step S2104, step S2108, step S2111, step S2114 to step S2116, or after making a negative determination in step S2110, step S2112 or step S2113, the process proceeds to step S2117. In step S2117, it is determined whether or not any of the BB effects is currently being executed. When any of the BB effects is being executed, in step S2118, it is determined whether or not the first BB end flag or the second BB end flag is set, and whether the BB state has already ended. Determine if not. If any of the BB end flags are set, the process of subtracting 1 from the counter after the end is executed in step S2119.

Then, it is determined in step S2120 whether or not the counter becomes 0 after the end, and if it becomes 0, the end processing of the BB effect being executed in step S2121 is executed, and then the BB notification is sent. The first process is finished. That is, if the first BB effect is being executed, the first BB effect is ended, and if the second BB effect is being executed, the second BB effect is ended. Further, even if the counter is not 0 after the end, if the AT winning notification command or the trigger non-winning command is received in step S2122 and the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed, the AT mode transition lottery is executed. The process proceeds to step S2121, the end processing of the BB effect being executed is executed, and then the first BB notification process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S2117, step S2118 or step S2122, the first BB notification process is terminated as it is.

That is, each BB effect ends when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed after the end of the BB state, and even when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not executed. , It ends when the counter becomes 0 after the next BB winning or the end.

<Relationship between each BB state and AT mode transition lottery>
The relationship between the playability and the effect of causing a specific opportunity while limiting the transition to the lottery mode by shifting to each BB state will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 60 and 61.

For example, when the internal state of carrying over the second BB winning is played in a 3-bet game, the game shifts to an advantageous section at the timing of t21, and the counting of the number of games up to a specific opportunity is started, the lottery mode is performed at the timing of t22. Has transitioned to the second mode. After that, the game is switched from the 3-bet game to the 2-bet game at the timing of t23, for example, by using special notification to determine the mode transition. Then, after the specific opportunity occurs at the timing of t24, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is executed by switching to the 3-bet game at the timing of t25. In this case, if the internal state is played in a 3-bet game, a decrease of about 1.77 cards can be expected per game, and if the internal state is played in a 2-bet game, a decrease of about 0.64 cards can be expected per game. It will be. That is, the games from t21 to t23 have a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game, and the games from t23 to t24 have a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game.

On the other hand, it is assumed that the lottery mode shifts to the second mode at the timing of t27 when the advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section at the timing of t26 and the counting of the number of games up to the specific opportunity is started. After that, it is assumed that the game is switched to the 2-bet game at the timing of t28 and the second BB prize is established at the timing of t29. In this case, in the second BB state from t29 to t31, although the game is played in the 3-bet game, the mode transition does not occur, so that the second mode is maintained. On the other hand, the counting of the number of games up to the specific opportunity continues, and the specific opportunity occurs at the timing of t30. After the second BB state is completed at the timing of t31, the benefits of the second mode can be enjoyed by switching to the 3-bet game and receiving the AT mode transition lottery.

Here, if the internal state is played in a 3-bet game as described above, a decrease of about 1.77 cards can be expected per game, and if the internal state is played in a 2-bet game, about 0.64 cards per game can be expected. Where a decrease is expected, in the second BB state, a decrease of about 0.00 cards is expected per game, and a decrease in medals is unlikely to occur (it is also difficult to increase). Then, the game from t26 to t28 reduces about 1.77 medals per game, which is the same as the case from t21 to t23, but the game from t28 to t29 has about 0.64 medals per game. The number of medals is reduced, and the number of medals is not reduced in the games from t29 to t31. That is, the number of games up to a specific opportunity is reduced by the amount that causes the second BB prize, and the number of medals reduced can be overwhelmingly reduced. By doing so, in order to perform a game that causes a specific opportunity in the restricted state, an act of not only switching the number of bets but also establishing a bonus prize is added, and the fun of the game is significantly improved.

Then, when the game is switched to the 2-bet game at the timing of t28, the second BB winning is already carried over. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the second BB winning effect is displayed together with the mode transition restriction notification effect. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the second BB prize can be established immediately, that is, it is possible to wait until the occurrence of a specific opportunity while suppressing the decrease in the number of medals held.

When the second BB prize is established at t29, the production for the second BB is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the mode transition restriction notification effect and the medal reduction suppression effect are also executed, and it is possible to grasp that it is more advantageous for the player than continuing the internal state by the 2-bet game. Will be done. Then, as the game progresses, the game number notification effect is also updated, and when a specific opportunity occurs at t30, the above-mentioned standby effect such as "Defeat the enemy with MAXBET !!" occurs, and the second BB state is set. After the end, it will be notified that it is possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity.

As described above, in the present embodiment, although the first BB can be won in the 3-bet game, the second BB cannot be won, and the second BB can be won in the 2-bet game. It is not possible to win 1BB. Then, in the 3-bet game, the 1st BB prize can be established but the 2nd BB prize cannot be established, and in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB prize can be established but the 1st BB prize cannot be established. It has become. In other words, if the internal state of carrying over the 2nd BB winning is played in a 3-bet game, the 2nd BB winning does not occur, and by switching to the 2-bet game, it is possible to establish the carrying over 2nd BB winning. It becomes. In this case, if the non-internal state after the end of the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game, the first BB can be won and the first BB prize can also be established.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, when the counting of the number of games is started at the timing of t41 until the transition to the advantageous section and the occurrence of a specific opportunity occurs, the first BB prize is established at the timing of t42, which is the first mode. Let's say. In this case, as described above, although the lottery mode does not shift during the first BB state, the number of games is counted up to the specific trigger. Therefore, for example, the specific trigger occurs at the timing of t43 during the first BB state. Can occur. Then, when the first BB state ends at the timing of t44 and the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed in the 3-bet game, the AT mode transition lottery in the first mode on the low probability side is performed as described above. It is unlikely that you will win the AT mode transition.

In other words, in the internal state where the 1st BB winning is carried over, there is a possibility that the 1st BB winning will occur unintentionally before the transition to the 1st mode in the 3-bet game, and then based on a specific opportunity. There is a high possibility that the AT mode transition lottery will be a lottery in the first mode on the low probability side. Therefore, in the internal state in which the first BB winning is carried over, a game is forced to avoid the first BB winning every game before shifting to the second mode while determining the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery. become.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the first credit insertion switch 56 as the MAXBET button is operated, the number of bets corresponding to the value of the MAX bet counter is bet, but the MAX bet counter in the non-internal state is 2. The MAX bet counter is set to 3 when the internal state is set. That is, when the first BB state or the second BB state ends and becomes the non-internal state, the MAX bet counter becomes 2, and when the game of operating the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed, the non-internal state naturally depends on the 2-bet game. It becomes a game, and the game is played in a restricted state in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted.

That is, the MAX bet counter is set to 2 at the timing of t44, which means that the 3-bet game is executed by inserting three medals from the medal insertion slot 45 in the figure. Then, by winning the first BB at the timing of t45, the MAX bet counter is set to 3.

It is assumed that when the player shifts to the advantageous section at the timing of t46 and shifts to the second mode at the timing of t47, the game is switched to the 2-bet game at the timing of t48 and the second BB prize is established at the timing of t49. In these situations, the MAX bet counter is 3 in the internal state until the second BB winning is established at the timing of t48, and when the game of switching to the two-bet game is performed at the timing of t48, the first credit insertion switch 56 Instead, it is necessary to operate the second credit insertion switch 57 or insert medals from the medal insertion slot 45 to place a bet. Since the MAX bet counter is 3 even in the second BB state, in the second BB state from t49 to t51, the desired game (game in the restricted state) can be performed by operating the first credit insertion switch 56. Is possible.

When the second BB state ends at the timing of t51 after the specific trigger occurs at the timing of t50, the non-internal state is established. In this case, since the MAX bet counter is 2, in the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the game in the 2-bet game is continued. In the non-internal state, in the 2-bet game, the second BB is won with a relatively high probability of about 1 in 4.95, and if the second BB prize is not established in the winning game, the internal state is reached. When the internal state is reached, the MAX bet counter becomes 3, and in the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the game shifts to the internal state of t52, the game switches to the 3-bet game, and the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed. Will be done.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game that causes a specific opportunity is switched from the 3-bet game to the 2-bet game while maintaining the second mode on the high probability side as the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery and suppressing the decrease in medals. This is achieved by establishing the second BB prize, and after the second BB state is completed, the restricted state is urged to be maintained until the second BB is won again. By doing so, the chance that the internal state carrying over the first BB winning is executed in the 3-bet game is less likely to occur. As a result, the event that the AT mode transition lottery is received in the first mode on the low probability side due to the unintentional establishment of the first BB prize, and the first BB prize in order to prevent such an event from occurring. It is possible to preferably avoid forcing a game to avoid each game, and it is possible to realize a smoother game while not inflicting a disadvantage on the player.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, in order to play the non-internal state after the second BB state as described above in the 2-bet game, the effect during the second BB state can be continued until the internal state is reached. That is, the second BB effect started at the timing of t49 that shifts to the second BB state does not end at the timing of t51 when the second BB state ends, and can continue until the timing of t52 that becomes the internal state. By doing so, although a specific opportunity has already occurred and it is possible to receive an AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity as long as the game is switched to the 3-bet game, switching to the 3-bet game is possible. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity for playing a game in a 2-bet game.

On the other hand, for example, when the game hall is about to close, the game time is limited, and after the second BB state is completed, there are also scenes where the time to play the game by the 2-bet game and even the medal are regrettable until the internal state is reached. I can imagine. In that respect, in the present embodiment, not only the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 but also the medal insertion slot 45 can bet, so that the internal state is set after the second BB state is completed. It is also possible to switch to the 3-bet game immediately after the end of the second BB state and receive the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity without playing the game by the 2-bet game up to (FIG. 60). By doing so, it becomes possible to play the game while respecting the intention of the player.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Allowable game (first game, non-internal state or internal state 3-bet game) where the lottery mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery may occur and restricted game (second game) in which the transition of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. , BB state game, non-internal state or internal state 2-bet game), and the number of advantageous section games AG that is counted in both the allowable game and the restricted game is 50 as a predetermined number. The AT mode transition lottery will be held with the achievement of the above as a specific opportunity. By doing so, after shifting the lottery mode to the second mode on the high probability side in the permissible game, the game is switched to the limited game and the shift of the lottery mode is avoided until the number of advantageous section games AG reaches a predetermined number. It becomes possible to realize game playability, and the interest of the game is improved.

In this case, not only the transition of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery but also the AT mode transition lottery itself is restricted by the restricted game. Therefore, after the number of advantageous section games AG reaches a predetermined number, the allowable game is started. By playing the game, the AT mode transition lottery will be performed. By doing so, not only the second mode is determined and the game is switched to the restricted game, but also the game is performed while knowing that the number of advantageous section games AG reaches a predetermined number, that is, the restricted game is switched to the allowable game. It is necessary to grasp the timing, and it is possible to improve the playability in the restricted game.

In the present embodiment, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined number has been reached by the lottery notice effect and the standby effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined number has been reached and the number of games until the predetermined number is reached by the game number notification effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to play the game while grasping how soon a specific opportunity will occur, and not only whether or not there is a BB prize and the timing of switching to the 2-bet game, but also the transition to the second mode can be performed. If the situation does not occur, the game can be played while grasping the time limit, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the first permissible game after the specific opportunity occurs, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the restricted game due to the specific opportunity. It is also possible to prevent an event such as the shift of the lottery mode due to the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is not easily performed after switching to the allowable game after the occurrence of a specific opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize the playability of switching to the permissible game by determining the occurrence of a specific opportunity.

Furthermore, the special notification is performed by winning the special notification lottery, and the winning probability of the special notification lottery is higher when staying in the second mode than when staying in the first mode. It is possible to capture the special notification as a suggestion effect of staying in the second mode. As a result, the player can switch from the permissible game to the restricted game by using the special notification as an index.

The special notification lottery is set so that the larger the value of the trigger through counter indicating the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the easier it is to win. The more the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the more special Notification is likely to occur. That is, it becomes easy to determine that the person is staying in the second mode, and as a result, it becomes easy to win the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity. By doing so, it is possible to realize the ceiling function of the AT mode transition lottery by using the special notification.

In this case, the special notification can be regarded as a notification corresponding to the number of bets, not a notification of staying in the second mode. That is, the level of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is not directly notified, but it can be regarded as a suggestion effect of the type of game to be executed (restricted game and allowable game). As a result, the player can also grasp the game to be played from the special notification.

If the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won, the advantageous section is terminated, and at the end of the advantageous section, the main controller 101 side is configured to initialize the advantageous section information. On the other hand, since the trigger through counter that determines the execution probability of the special notification is managed on the display control device 81 side, the ease of winning the AT mode transition lottery is determined through the special notification across advantageous sections. It becomes possible to adjust.

In the special notification lottery, the winning probability differs depending on the set value set in the winning probability setting process. Therefore, for example, there is a circumstance that a setting difference cannot be provided for the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery. However, it can be realized through special notification.

In this case, the special notification is set to be executed as the all-stop effect in the all-stop effect setting process, and is executed at the end of the game. On the other hand, the process for transitioning to the lottery mode such as the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is executed by the lottery result corresponding process on the main control device 101 side, that is, in one game, the lottery is performed before the execution of the special notification. Processing for mode transition is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an event such as after the transition to the lottery mode from occurring even though the special notification is used as an index to switch to the restricted game.

The AT lottery mode transition lottery process allows a transition to the first mode or a transition to the second mode to occur depending on the lottery result of the game, so that a specific opportunity is generated in the limited game and a high probability In the playability aiming to receive the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode on the side, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the attention of each game without neglecting the lottery result of each game.

In this case, when it becomes a specific role as a so-called rare role, the transition from the first mode to the second mode is likely to occur, and when it becomes the so-called normal lip A to the normal lip C, the transition from the second mode to the first mode occurs. Since the transition from the first mode to the second mode can occur even in the normal role on the premise that the mode transition is likely to occur, it is not possible to definitively determine the mode transition only by the lottery result of each game. It becomes impossible, and it becomes possible to enhance the fun of the game that predicts the mode transition.

When a specific combination is won in a permissible game, an AT mode transition lottery triggered by the specific combination can be performed. Therefore, an AT mode transition can occur without going through an AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity. As a result, the game will be diversified. Moreover, by doing so, rather than a game in which only restricted games are executed and only AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is received, the second mode is entered while receiving an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific role in an allowable game. The AT mode transition is more likely to occur in the game waiting for the transition, and it is possible to motivate the game to be performed in the permissible game.

Moreover, although it is possible to win a specific role in a restricted game as a two-bet game, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific role winning is restricted, so even though the specific role has been won, the AT mode The regret that the transition lottery is not performed can be used as a boost to perform the permissible game.

The game base, which is the average value per game of the number of medals required for the game and the number of medals paid out as a result of the game, is higher in the 2-bet game as a restricted game than in the 3-bet game as an allowable game. Therefore, by switching to the 2-bet game after determining the transition to the second mode, it is possible to generate a specific opportunity while relatively suppressing the loss of medals. That is, the earlier the transition to the second mode occurs, and the earlier the transition to the second mode is determined, the smaller the number of medals required to generate a specific opportunity, so that the transition to the second mode occurs. The degree of attention to is dramatically increased, and it becomes possible to realize an interesting playability in consideration of the actual medal loss.

Further, if a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state is generated as a restricted game, these BB states are set to be higher than the 2-bet game in the game base, so that the specific opportunity remains as the 2-bet game. The number of medals required by a specific opportunity is smaller than that of causing. In other words, the transition to the second mode occurs earlier, it is determined earlier, and the second BB prize and the first BB prize occur earlier, thereby reducing the medal loss required by a specific opportunity. It becomes possible. Therefore, in addition to improving the playability by creating a room for knowledge intervention such as determining the transition to the second mode, the game playability is also improved by creating a room for the player's technical intervention such as establishing a BB prize. , It will be possible to realize an unprecedentedly interesting game.

Moreover, it is not necessary to unnecessarily establish the BB prize, and depending on the BB prize timing and the end timing of the BB state, a specific opportunity may not occur. Therefore, it is necessary to determine the BB prize timing. More specifically, if the BB winning timing is too early, it is necessary to play a game in a 2-bet game after the end of the BB state, and if the BB winning is too late, the BB state is further increased even after a specific opportunity occurs. Must be digested, and there is concern about a decrease in time efficiency.

In this case, even in the internal state, if the advantageous section is used, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is counted. Therefore, in the internal state in which the BB winning is carried over, the timing at which the BB prize should be established is determined, and the desired timing is obtained. At that time, it is possible to play a game that establishes a BB prize. That is, if the desired timing is reached, the BB winning is waited, and then the BB winning is attempted, the difference between the desired timing and the BB winning may become large. In that respect, since it is a game that can wait for the occurrence of a specific opportunity in the internal state as described above, it is possible to generate a BB prize earlier, and it is inconvenient due to a difference in the winning timing (especially time efficiency). It becomes possible to avoid the decrease).

Here, in the present embodiment, basically, a 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over is a normal game, and the 2nd BB can win a prize in the 2-bet game and cannot win in the 3-bet game. Therefore, it is necessary to switch to the 2-bet game in order to perform the limited game while suppressing the loss of the medals held by the BB winning. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which a second BB prize is unintentionally established in a normal game in a 3-bet game, resulting in a restricted game.

In this case, since the MAX bet counter is set to 2 in the non-internal state and 3 in the internal state, in the game of operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the non-internal state is reached after the end of the BB state. Naturally, the game is played in the 2-bet game, and by winning the 2nd BB in the 2-bet game, the game becomes an internal state and the game is switched to the 3-bet game. By doing so, it becomes easy to perform a normal game of a 3-bet game in which the second BB winning is carried over, and for example, it becomes possible to make it difficult to play a game in a state in which the first BB winning is carried over. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the permissible game from being forced to stop the operation of avoiding the first BB winning, and the game can proceed smoothly.

On the other hand, in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, a 2-bet game can be played by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56 or inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45. In the situation where 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, the game can be played in a 3-bet game by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56. It is said. Therefore, for example, it is permitted to play a game in a 3-bet game after the end of the BB state, such as just before the closing of the game hall, and before winning the second BB. By doing so, the second BB is won within the range that does not eliminate the real thrill of the slot machine 10 game, such as starting the game by the player's own start operation and ending the game by the player's own end operation. It is possible to carry over the game.

Further, as described above, after the end of the BB state, the game is facilitated in the 2-bet game until the second BB is won, and the BB production is also configured to continue until the second BB is won. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity that the game in the non-internal state in the 2-bet game is recommended even though the BB state has ended.

However, for example, as described above, a game in which a player wants to switch to a 3-bet game after the end of the BB state and before winning the second BB and receive an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity, such as just before the game hall closes. Assuming the needs of the person, after the end of the BB state, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed, and the BB production is ended. Therefore, only the BB production is performed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of continuing.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the second BB is not won after the end of the BB state, the BB effect is ended after a predetermined number of games (3 or 5 games). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the BB production continues endlessly even if the second BB is not won. By the way, after the end of the 2nd BB state, the number of games in which the production for the 2nd BB can be continued is set as a number larger than the denominator of the winning probability (about 1 / 4.95) of the 2nd BB, and is basically set. Is configured to end the production for the second BB based on the winning of the second BB.

<Modification example 1>
In the above first embodiment, the first mode and the second mode are switched back and forth through the AT lottery mode transition lottery process, but in this modified example, the first mode is set according to the number of games in the advantageous section AG. The configuration is such that the interaction with the second mode occurs.

FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous section transition game in this modification. As described above, the advantageous section shift game process is executed as the process on the main control device 101 side in the game that shifts to the advantageous section in the section display first process.

In step S2301, the lottery process of the mode transition table is executed. That is, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 63A, there are a plurality of types of mode transition tables in which the relationship between the advantageous section game number AG and the transition game between the first mode and the second mode is set. It is stored in various table storage areas 105a. More specifically, for example, in the mode transition table of the address information M0001, if the advantageous section game number AG is 1 to 10, it is set to the second mode, and if the advantageous section game number AG is 11 to 49, it is set to the first mode. Indicates that it will be set. Further, in the mode transition table of the address information M0005, if the number of advantageous section games AG is 1 to 40, it is set to the second mode, and if the number of advantageous section games is 41 to 49, it is set to the first mode. Shown. The process of step S2301 is a process of determining the mode transition table to be used in the advantageous section this time by lottery from the plurality of stored mode transition tables.

More specifically about the mode transition table in which a plurality of types are set, each mode transition table is set so that the first mode and the second mode may occur regardless of the number of advantageous section games AG. It is set. That is, it is set so that the type of the lottery mode is not determined only by the advantageous section game number AG. Further, in the mode transition table in this modification, the mode transition table is set so as to include at least the section which is the second mode, and is the first mode regardless of the value of the advantageous section game number AG. Not. On the other hand, in the mode transition table of the address information MXXX, the advantageous section game number AG is set to the second mode with all the values of 1 to 49, and the mode transition table does not include the section which is the first mode. It has become.

In step S2302, a process of storing the address information of the determined mode transition table in the address information storage area 106f is executed based on the processing result of step S2301. After that, in step S2303, the process of setting the table command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game is terminated. The table command contains information on the type of mode transition table set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time.

In the display control device 81, for example, when a table command is received as the table notification process (FIG. 62 (b)) executed in step S1615 (other start effect setting process) in the start effect setting process. The process is set.

That is, in the table notification process, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the table command has been received, and if the table command is received, the information of the mode transition table included in the table command is input in step S2312. The process of storing in the address information storage area 183c is executed. If the information of the mode transition table is already stored, the information of the new mode transition table is stored after deleting the information. If the table command has not been received in step S2311, the table notification process is terminated as it is.

After executing the process of step S2312, in step S2313, it is determined whether or not the trigger through counter is larger than the predetermined number (5). If the number is less than the predetermined number, the table notification process is terminated as it is. When the number is larger than the predetermined number, that is, when the number of consecutive times in which the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won is larger than the predetermined number, the table notification lottery process is executed in step S2314. The table notification lottery process is a process of drawing whether or not to notify the information of the type of the mode transition table this time. For example, the winning is performed according to the value of the trigger through counter, the set value, and the type of the mode transition table. The probabilities are different. More specifically, for example, the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery, and the higher the set value, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. The type of the mode transition table is set so that, for example, the mode transition table in which the section in the second mode is secured for a long time is more likely to win the table notification lottery.

After executing the table notification lottery process in step S2314, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if it is not won, the table notification processing is terminated as it is. If it is won, in step S2316, a process of reading the stored mode transition table and acquiring the effect data corresponding to the mode transition table from the RAM 183 is executed. As shown in FIG. 63, the effect data corresponding to the mode transition table is set with the effect data associated with the mode transition table on a one-to-one basis, and the player can perform the effect corresponding to each effect data. Different enough to be identified. Instead of the configuration in which the mode transition table and the effect data are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, a configuration in which a plurality of mode transition tables and the effect data of 1 are associated with each other may be used, or the mode transition of 1 may be performed. The table and a plurality of effect data may be associated with each other.

After the effect data is acquired in step S2316, the table notification effect based on the acquired effect data is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S2317, and then the table notification is performed. End the processing. As the table notification effect, for example, one table notification effect is performed by combining the background color and type of the auxiliary display unit 65, the position where the main character is displayed, and the size at which the main character is displayed. For example, when the background color of the auxiliary display unit 65 is blue, the display position of the main character is in the center, and the display size of the main character is medium, the table notification corresponding to the mode transition table of the address information M0001 Even if the background color and the position of the main character are the same, if the display size of the main character is large, the table notification effect corresponding to the mode transition table of the address information M0002 is performed, and the same background color and the main character are produced. Even at the position of, if the display size of the main character is small, it becomes a table notification effect corresponding to the mode transition table of the address information M0003, and so on, by combining each parameter, it becomes one mode transition table. The corresponding table notification effect is configured. In this case, the player can predict the mode transition table set at the time of transition to the advantageous section based on the table notification effect.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the table notification effect is set in a one-to-one relationship with each mode transition table, and in addition to or instead of the configuration in which one mode transition table can be specified from the table notification effect, a plurality of mode transition tables One table notification effect is associated with the effect mode, and it may be difficult to identify one mode transition table from the table notification effect. In this case, for example, each mode transition table may be classified according to the number of games assigned to the second mode, the timing of the game to be the second mode, and the like, and the table notification effect may be associated with each classification.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in this modification. As already explained, the AT lottery process is a process executed in the lottery result correspondence process, and is allowed to be executed when the number of bets is a specific specified number, and is executed when the limit state is not the specified specified number. Is a restricted process.

In step S2401, the process of grasping the mode transition table set in the advantageous section this time is executed by reading the address information of the mode transition table stored in the address information storage area 106f. In the following step S2402, a process of grasping the advantageous section game number AG is executed. Then, in step S2403, by comparing the mode transition table with the advantageous section game number AG, it is determined whether or not this game is a game corresponding to the first mode.

For example, when the mode transition table has the address information M0001, as described above, when the advantageous section game number AG is 1 to 10, the second mode is set, and when the advantageous section game number AG is 11 to 49, the first mode is set. However, in step S2403, when the number of advantageous section games AG is 11 to 49, it is determined affirmatively that this game corresponds to the first mode.

When it is determined in step S2403 that the game corresponds to the first mode, in step S2404, it is determined whether or not the first mode flag has already been set. If the first mode flag is not set and the previous AT lottery process is executed in the second mode, the process of setting the first mode flag is executed in step S2405. Then, in step S2406, a process of setting the first mode transition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the game corresponds to the second mode. That is, when the mode transition table has the address information M0001, and the advantageous section game number AG is 1 to 10, it is judged affirmatively that this game corresponds to the second mode.

When it is determined in step S2407 that the game corresponds to the second mode, in step S2408, it is determined whether or not the first mode flag is set. When the first mode flag is set and the previous AT lottery process is executed in the first mode, the process of clearing the first mode flag is executed in step S2409. Then, in step S2410, a process of setting the second mode transition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, a process of step S2406 or step S2410 is executed, or a negative determination is made in step S2407 or step S2408, the process proceeds to step S2411. In steps S241 to S2416, the process for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the same manner as the process in steps S812 to S817. Further, in steps S2417 to S2424, the same processing as in steps S818 to S824 is executed according to the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

Here, in the mode transition table, as shown in FIG. 63, the lottery mode in which the advantageous section game number AG is 50 or more is not defined. That is, when the number of advantageous section games AG is 50 or more, a negative determination is made in both step S2403 and step S2407. Then, after the advantageous section game number AG becomes 50 and a specific opportunity occurs, the lottery mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery does not occur regardless of the value of the advantageous section game number AG thereafter.

By doing so, when a game is played with a bet according to a specific specified number, the first mode and the second mode are switched according to the value of the advantageous section game number AG, but the bet is different from the specified specified number. When the game is played, the configuration is such that the first mode and the second mode do not come and go regardless of the value of the advantageous section game number AG.

More specifically, for example, when the mode transition table of the address information M0001 is set, the second mode is set in the game in which the number of advantageous section games AG is up to 10, and the first mode is set in 11 or later. It is possible to proceed with the game while maintaining the second mode by switching from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game in a game having an advantageous section game number AG of up to 10 and setting the game in a restricted state. .. Then, after the number of advantageous section games becomes 50 and the opportunity lottery flag is set, it is possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity in the second mode by switching to the 3-bet game.

As described above, in this modification, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is set by the mode transition table and the advantageous section game number AG, so that the lottery mode transition is performed between the mode transition table and the advantageous section game. From the number AG, it becomes possible to grasp in advance on the game machine side. That is, in the first embodiment, since the lottery mode is shifted after the AT lottery mode transition lottery process in the allowable game, the lottery mode transition is specified until the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is performed. Although it is not possible to do so, it is possible to grasp the lottery mode in advance by using the above modified example. Moreover, even if the lottery mode is not actually changed in the permissible game, it is possible to grasp which lottery mode will be used in the restricted game if it is the permissible game. Therefore, for example, the first Despite the mode, it is possible to realize a game in which the timing for switching to the 3-bet game is determined, such as when the game is switched to the 2-bet game.

As the mode transition table, a plurality of mode transition tables are stored in advance, and these plurality of mode transition tables are set so that it is not determined which mode is staying from the advantageous section game number AG. More specifically, for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section (number of games in the advantageous section AG) is 1 to 10 games, the mode transition table of the address information M0001 is set to the second mode, but the address. If it is the mode transition table of information M0002, it is set to the first mode, if it is 11 games to 20 games, it is set to the first mode if it is the mode transition table of address information M0001, and if it is address information M0002, it is set to the second mode. Each number of games has a mode transition table that is set to each lottery mode so that the lottery mode in which the player is staying is not determined only by the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section, such as being set to the mode. I set it. By doing so, the significance of playing the game of predicting the mode transition table is guaranteed.

On the other hand, since it is possible to perform an effect suggesting each mode transition table as a table notification effect at the time of transition to the advantageous section, that is, when the mode transition table is set, the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section and its From the contents of the table notification effect, it is possible to perform a game that predicts the lottery mode in which the player is currently staying and the lottery mode in the future.

In this case, for example, when an effect corresponding to the address information M0001 is performed as a table notification effect, any game from the first game to the tenth game may be played in an allowable game after the transition to the advantageous section. For later games, it will be necessary to play limited games until a specific opportunity occurs. That is, if it is possible to detect by the 10th game that the mode transition table of the address information M0001 has been set from the table notification effect or the special notification, the game is switched to the restricted game by the 11th game and the game is played up to the 49th game. By doing so, it becomes possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity while maintaining the second mode. In other words, in this case, if the mode transition table cannot be detected by the 10th game, or if any of the games from the 11th game to the 49th game is played in the allowable game, the AT mode based on a specific opportunity is used. The transition lottery must be received in the first mode on the low probability side. By doing so, the importance of detecting the mode transition table and switching to the restricted game is increased, and the fun of such a game is improved.

Further, for example, when an effect corresponding to the address information M0005 is performed as a table notification effect, any game from the 41st game to the 49th game may be played in the allowable game after the transition to the advantageous section. For later games, you may play limited games. That is, after it is possible to detect that the mode transition table of the address information M0005 has been set from the table notification effect or the special notification, at least the 48th game may be played in the restricted game, for example, 2 bets. While suppressing the decrease in medals in the game, it is possible to wait for a specific opportunity and the transition to the second mode. In this case, for example, by establishing the second BB prize, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in medals in the restricted game, but for example, the second BB prize is generated in the fifth game, and the second BB state is 44 games. If it continues, the end game in the second BB state will be the 49th game, and any of the games from the 41st game to the 49th game cannot be played in the allowable game. That is, the opportunity to shift to the second mode is missed. Then, even if the second BB prize is established, the importance of the prize timing becomes more important, and the degree of attention to the number of continuous games in the second BB state (lottery result of each game in the second BB state) is also playful. Will be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

The table notification effect is executed after the table notification lottery, and the table notification lottery is set so that the winning probability differs depending on the set value and the value of the trigger through counter. More specifically, the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery, and the higher the set value, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. By doing so, the more the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the more likely it is that the AT mode transition lottery will be received in the second mode, and the higher the setting, the more the opportunity to receive the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode. Is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to realize the setting difference of the AT mode transition rate through the table notification effect, and it is also possible to realize the ceiling function of the AT mode transition through the table notification effect.

Further, the table notification lottery is set so that the winning probability differs depending on the type of the set mode transition table. More specifically, as the type of the mode transition table, for example, the mode transition table in which the section which is the second mode is secured for a long time is set so that the table notification lottery can be easily won. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that the player cannot detect the table without being notified even though the table having a long section in the second mode is selected. ..

<Modification 2>
A modified example of the BB state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the present modification, the benefits corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination in the 2-bet game are different from those in the first embodiment, and this modification In the example, as a privilege corresponding to the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination, two medals, which are the same number as the number of bets, are paid out. Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the lottery table for the first BB state and the second BB state in this modified example, there is a high probability of a common bell having an index value IV = 10 (100% probability in this modified example). It is set to win in.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the bonus state processing in this modification.

The process of steps S2601 to S2603 is the same as the process of steps S501 to S503, and executes a process of setting the MAX bet counter to 3 when the first BB or the second BB is won and the internal state is entered. .. When it is determined in step S2604 that the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established, in this modification, the process of setting the MAX bet counter to 2 is executed in step S2605. Then, when it is determined in step S2606 that the first BB winning is established, in this modification, the process of inputting 110 to the BB counter is executed in step S2607. After that, the first BB winning flag is cleared in step S2608, the first BB state flag is set in step S2609, the first BB start command is set in step S2610, and then the specified number of bets is set to 2 in step S2611. After setting, end the bonus status processing. That is, in this modification, the first BB state is executed in the 2-bet game, and ends when 110 medals are paid out. Further, in the first BB state, since the common bell in which two medals are paid out is always won, the first BB state requires 55 games to finish. That is, the number of games required to end the first BB state is larger than the number of games required to end the specific opportunity, and by shifting to the first BB state, after the end of the first BB state, there is always In the lottery mode before the transition to the first BB state, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity can be executed.

If it is determined in step S2606 that the first BB winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S2612 and the process of inputting 50 to the BB counter is executed. After that, the second BB winning flag is cleared in step S2613, the second BB state flag is set in step S2614, the second BB start command is set in step S2615, and then the specified number of bets is set to 2 in step S2611. After setting, end the bonus status processing. That is, in this modification, the second BB state is also executed in the 2-bet game, and the game ends when 50 medals are paid out, which is less than that of the first BB state. Further, even in the second BB state, since the common bell in which two medals are paid out is always won, the second BB state requires 25 games to finish. That is, the number of games required to end the second BB state is less than the number of games required to end the specific opportunity, and when shifting to the second BB state, after the end of the second BB state, the second 2 The AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity can be executed in a lottery mode different from the lottery mode before the transition to the BB state.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, in steps S2616 to S2618, the BB counter subtraction process based on the small winning combination is performed in the same manner as in steps S515 to S517. Then, when the BB counter becomes 0 or less, the corresponding BB state flag is cleared in step S2619, the corresponding BB end command is set in step S2620, and the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 in step S2621. After setting, end the bonus status processing. That is, since the first BB state and the second BB state are performed in the 2-bet game and the MAX bet counter is also set to 2, in this modification, the MAX bet counter is changed when shifting to the non-internal state. (Step S519) is not performed.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (c1) and 65 (c2), in the lottery result handling process and the winning result handling process in this modified example, when the number is not a specific specified number according to the game state, the processing related to the instruction function is executed. In the limiting process, it is determined in step S2501 or step S2511 whether or not any of the BB state flags is set, and if it is a non-internal state or an internal state that is not set, in step S2502 or step S2512. Determine if it is a 3-bet game. In the case of a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, the lottery result handling process and the winning result handling process are terminated as they are without performing the subsequent processing. Further, even when any of the BB state flags is set, it is determined in step S2503 and step S2513 whether or not the game is a 3-bet game. In the case of a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, the lottery result handling process and the winning result handling process are terminated as they are without performing the subsequent processing. That is, 3 is set as a specific specified number for any of the non-internal state, the internal state, and the BB state, and in the case of a 3-bet game, the process related to the instruction function in the lottery result correspondence process and the winning result correspondence process (step). The processing after S604 and the processing after step S1104) are executed.

The processing related to the trigger through counter in this modification will be described. As described above, the trigger through counter is a counter corresponding to the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won, and the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the more the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery. The incidence of special notifications suggesting is high. Further, in the above-described modification 1, the table notification effect for the mode transition table is likely to occur as the value of the trigger through counter increases. In this modified example, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won depending on the type of the state when the specific opportunity occurs, including the first BB state and the second BB state in which the number of games required for digestion is different as described above. When becomes, the value to be added to the through counter is different.

FIG. 67A shows a trigger adjustment process in this modification. The trigger adjustment process is executed as a process on the display control device 81 side, for example, in other all-stop effect setting processes in the all-stop effect setting process.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger command has been received. If it has not been received, the main adjustment process is terminated as it is. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2702, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state. If it is a specific trigger that occurred during the first BB state, the process of setting the first BB trigger flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2703, and then the present adjustment process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2704 to determine whether or not the current gaming state is the second BB state. If it is a specific trigger that occurred during the second BB state, the process of setting the second BB trigger flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2705, and then the present adjustment process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, the process proceeds to step S2706 to determine whether or not the current game has been executed in the 2-bet game. In the case of a specific trigger generated in the 2-bet game, the process of setting the 2-bet trigger flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2707, and then the present adjustment process is terminated. If it is determined in step S2706 that it is a specific opportunity that occurred in the 3-bet game, the main adjustment process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 67B is a flowchart showing a part of the AT lottery mode notification process in this modification.

After making a negative determination in step S1703 or executing the process of step S1704, it is determined in step S2711 whether or not a non-winning command has been received, as in step S1705. If the command is received and the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won, it is determined in step S2712 whether or not the above-mentioned first BB trigger flag is set. If it is set, the process of clearing the first BB trigger flag is executed in step S2713.

If the first BB trigger flag is not set in step S2712, it is determined in step S2714 whether or not the second BB trigger flag is set. If it is set, the process of clearing the second BB trigger flag is executed in step S2715, and the process of adding 1 to the trigger through counter is executed in step S2716.

If the second BB trigger flag is not set in step S2714, it is determined in step S2717 whether or not the 2-bet trigger flag is set. If it is set, the process of clearing the 2-bet trigger flag is executed in step S2718, and the process of adding 2 to the trigger through counter is executed in step S2719. Then, when the 2-bet trigger flag is not set in step S2717, the process of adding 3 to the trigger through counter is executed in step S2720.

If a negative determination is made in step S2711, or after executing any of the processes of step S2713, step S2716, step S2719, and step S2720, the process proceeds to step S1707 to determine whether or not the AT winning notification command has been received. Do.

That is, the case where the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific trigger generated during the second BB state is better than the case where the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific trigger generated during the first BB state. When the AT mode transition lottery is not won, many values are added to the trigger through counter, 0 is added in the case of the first BB state, and 1 is added in the case of the second BB state. In addition, the AT mode is more relevant in the AT mode based on the specific trigger generated during the 2-bet game than in the case where the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific trigger generated during the first BB state or the second BB state. Many values are added to the trigger through counter when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, 0 or 1 is added in the case of the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and 2 is added in the case of a 2-bet game. Will be done. Then, in the case of the AT mode based on the specific opportunity generated during the 3-bet game, the AT mode transition lottery is performed more than when the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific opportunity generated during the 2-bet game. In the case of a non-winning game, a large number of values are added to the trigger through counter, 2 is added in the case of a 2-bet game, and 3 is added in the case of a 3-bet game.

As described above, by shifting to the first BB state, it is possible to digest 55 games while suppressing the decrease in medals held, and shifting to the first BB state regardless of the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section. It is possible to generate a specific opportunity without reducing the number of medals held. On the other hand, by shifting to the second BB state, it is possible to digest 25 games while suppressing the decrease in the number of medals held, and by causing the second BB prize when the number of advantageous section games AG is 25 or later, the second BB It is possible to generate a specific opportunity during the state. That is, in both the first BB state and the second BB state, it is possible to advance the count of the number of advantageous section games AG while limiting the mode transition, but the number of continuous games is different, and the first BB state is better. The number of continuous games is longer than in the second BB state.

In this case, for example, in the configuration in which the lottery mode is defined by the mode transition table as in the modification 1, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity of this time is performed in the second mode based on the table notification effect. The act of giving up receiving is assumed. More specifically, the mode transition table is specified by grasping that the mode transition table that is difficult to shift to the second mode on the high probability side is selected by the table notification effect, or by not performing the table notification effect. If it cannot be done, it is conceivable that by shifting to the first BB state, the action of proceeding with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of medals held until the next mode transition table selection trigger is performed. Therefore, when a specific trigger occurs during the first BB state as in the above configuration, even if the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won, the trigger through counter is less than usual. By adding (not adding) the values, the occurrence rate of the special notification and the table notification effect is unreasonably increased by repeating the generation of the specific trigger via the first BB state as described above. Can be resolved.

In addition, when a specific opportunity occurs during the second BB state, it is possible that at least 25 games other than the 25 games in the second BB state were played in the non-internal state or the internal state during the advantageous section of this time. Highly sexual. As already explained, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the number of medals decreased per game is larger than that in the first BB state and the second BB state. Therefore, in such a case, in the case of the second BB state, the value to be added to the trigger through counter is increased more than in the case of the first BB state, so that the above-mentioned non-internal state or internal state can be used. It can be used to compensate for the decrease in medals.

Further, even in the non-internal state or the internal state, the number of medals decreased in the 3-bet game is larger than that in the 2-bet game. Moreover, since the lottery mode may shift in the 3-bet game, even after the shift to the second mode, the shift to the first mode occurs before a specific opportunity occurs by playing the 3-bet game. There is a possibility that it will end up. Therefore, in the 3-bet game, the value to be added to the trigger through counter is increased in the 3-bet game, so that the number of medals in the non-internal state and the internal state as described above can be reduced and the lottery mode can be changed. It can be used as compensation for the risk.

<Modification example 3>
In this modified example, the number of games required until a specific opportunity occurs is determined by lottery. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous section transition game in this modified example. In addition, this modification will be described based on the first embodiment.

In step S2801, the lottery process of the trigger game is executed. The lottery process of the opportunity game is a process of determining the number of games in the advantageous section required until the specific opportunity occurs by lottery. Randomly determine the number of games. In the lottery, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a smaller number of games, and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a larger number of games.

In step S2802, a process of inputting the number of trigger games determined in step S2801 into various counter areas 106e into the trigger counter and storing the game is executed. Then, in step S2803, the process of setting the trigger game number command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game is terminated.

In the display control device 81, for example, the game number notification effect, the lottery notice effect, and the standby effect may not be executed, so that the player cannot or is difficult to specify that a specific opportunity has occurred. By doing so, in addition to the game that predicts that the lottery mode has shifted to the second mode on the high probability side, the game that predicts the occurrence of a specific opportunity and the number of games required until the specific opportunity occurs. It can be added to make the game even more interesting.

In this case, for example, the game number notification effect, the lottery notice effect, and the standby effect may be determined by lottery or the like, and the set value or the value of the trigger through counter may be used as the winning probability of the lottery. It may be a configuration that affects. That is, it is preferable that the higher the set value, the higher the occurrence rate of these effects, and the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the higher the occurrence rate of these effects.

FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing the lottery trigger determination process in this modified example.

In step S2811, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG matches the number of trigger games (trigger counter) stored in step S2802. If it is not an opportunity game, the lottery opportunity determination process is terminated as it is. In the case of the number of trigger games, the lottery trigger flag is set in step S2812, and the lottery trigger command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S2813, and then the final lottery trigger determination is performed. End the process.

By doing so, the number of games in which a specific opportunity occurs is diversified, so that the player can decide how long the limited game should be continued in order to play the game required until the specific opportunity occurs in the limited game. It becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, in addition to the game that predicts the lottery mode, the game that predicts the game in which a specific opportunity occurs is added, and the interest of the game is improved.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, the execution mode of the special notification is different. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a special notification process in this modification. As described above, the special notification process is a process executed in step S1806 in the all-stop effect setting process.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not this game is an advantageous section transition game. In the case of the advantageous section transition game, the process of grasping the trigger through counter is executed in step S2902. Then, in step S2903, the transition navigation lottery process is executed. The transition navigation lottery process is a process for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the transition navigation notification that the lottery mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the transition navigation lottery process, the transition navigation lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, and the transition navigation notification execution lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 70, the transition navigation lottery table is set so that the winning rate of the transition navigation lottery differs depending on the trigger through counter and the set value. The larger the value of the trigger through counter, the easier it is to win, and the set value is The higher it is, the easier it is to win. In addition, when the value of the trigger through counter is small, the even setting is set to be easier to win than the odd setting, and when the value of the trigger through counter is large, the odd setting is better than the even setting. It is set to make it easier to win.

In step S2904, it is determined whether or not the transition navigation lottery in step S2903 has been won, and if it is won, a process of setting the navigation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2905. The navigation flag is a flag for grasping in advance that the special notification will be executed when the lottery mode shifts to the first mode or the second mode.

That is, in this modification, the display control device 81 side does not know in real time that it is the first mode or the second mode, and only the transition of the lottery mode of the first mode or the second mode has occurred. It is configured to be grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71, in the AT lottery mode notification process in this modification, when the first mode transition command or the second mode transition command is received in step S3001, step S3002 is performed. It is determined whether or not the above navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is set, the special notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3003.

When a negative determination is made in step S3001 or step S3002, or after the process of step S3003 is executed, the process for managing the trigger through counter is executed in steps S3004 to S3007. The processes of steps S3004 to S3007 are the same as the processes of steps S1705 to S1708.

Returning to the description of the special notification process, if a negative determination is made in step S2901 or step S2904, or if the process of step S2905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2906. In step S2906, it is determined whether or not the above special notification flag is set. When the special notification flag is set, the special notification flag is cleared in step S2907, and the special notification is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as an effect when all stops are performed in step S2908. After executing the effect setting for performing, the special notification process is terminated.

That is, in this modification, the special notification can be executed as an effect at the time of total stop of the game in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode or the game in which the second mode is shifted to the first mode. Therefore, the player who confirmed the special notification may have changed the lottery mode from the first mode to the second mode based on the lottery result of the game, the presence / absence of the special notification in the game up to that point, the lottery result, and the like. Or, after predicting whether the game has shifted from the second mode to the first mode, if it is predicted that the game has shifted to the second mode, the game is switched from the next game to the restricted game, and a specific opportunity occurs while maintaining the second mode. It becomes possible to make it. By doing so, rather than the configuration in which the second mode is directly notified by the special notification, the fun of considering the lottery result of the game is added in performing the mode transition prediction game, and the lottery mode is predicted. The fun of the game can be enhanced.

That is, the transition from the first mode to the second mode is likely to occur in a specific role as a so-called rare role, and may occur in some normal rips A to C, while the transition from the second mode to the first mode is. , It is determined that the transition to the second mode has occurred when a special notification occurs in the game in which the specific role is won, although it is configured so that it does not occur in the specific role but occurs in the normal lip A to the normal lip C. To do. On the other hand, when a special notification occurs in the games in which the normal rip A to the normal rip C are won, the transition to the first mode may occur or the transition to the second mode occurs. In some cases. Then, for example, if a special notification is generated in a game in which a specific role is won, and then a special notification is generated in a game in which the normal rip A to the normal rip C are won, the normal rip A to the normal rip C winning game is generated. There is a high possibility that the special notification in will correspond to the transition to the first mode, so not only the game in which the special notification occurred, but also the game content of the previous game is taken into consideration, and the lottery mode It will be necessary to make predictions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the display control device 81 side does not know the first mode and the second mode, and is configured to be able to notify the transition of the lottery mode. Therefore, the processing related to the interests of the player, such as the lottery processing of each game, the management of the advantageous section, and the presence / absence of the transition of the display mode, is concentrated on the main control device 101 side, while the processing on the production is performed on the display control device 81 side. It is possible to realize playability using the lottery mode while ensuring the significance of decentralizing the processing load and facilitating fraud countermeasures by consolidating the control devices for which fraud countermeasures should be taken. It will be possible.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the AT mode transition lottery is changed. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in the present embodiment.

The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the random number acquisition process (step S3117) is executed after the second section display process is executed and before the winning result command is executed. The processing (steps S3101 to S3116, step S3118) is the same as the processing of steps S401 to S417 in the first embodiment.

<Random number acquisition process>
The random number acquisition process in step S3117 is a process for acquiring a random number for lottery used in the AT mode transition lottery in advance. As described above, the random number acquisition process is performed after the stop operations of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are performed in the reel control process. In other words, among the stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is performed based on the third stop OFF operation in the third stop operation.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set. If neither BB state flag is set, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the game ending this time is a 3-bet game. If it is determined in step S3201 that any of the BB status flags is set, it is determined in step S3203 whether or not the game ending this time is a 2-bet game. That is, the processes of steps S3201 to S3203 are processes for determining whether or not the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state, and whether or not the process related to the instruction function is allowed to be executed, or the execution thereof. Is a process of determining whether or not is a restricted state. Then, when it is determined in step S3202 that it is a 2-bet game, and when it is determined in step S3203 that it is a 3-bet game, a process of acquiring random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery after step S3204 is executed. The random number acquisition process is terminated as it is.

The case where it is determined in step S3202 that it is a 3-bet game and the case where it is determined in step S3203 that it is a 2-bet game proceed to step S3204. In step S3204, a process of acquiring AT counters provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The AT counter corresponds to a random number for lottery used in the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT counter is one in order within the range of 1 to 128 each time the timer update process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process is activated. It is a loop counter that is added and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 128).

It should be noted that, like the free run counter and the hard circuit used for determining whether or not the winning combination is correct, the dedicated free run counter and the hard circuit are used, and the relevant free run counter and the hard circuit are used before the processing of step S3204 (for example, at the time of the third stop ON operation). The hardware circuit may latch the value of the free run counter and read the latched value in step S3204. Note that the latched value may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 106 until the process of step S3204 is performed.

In step S3205, a process of storing the AT counter value acquired in step S3204 in the lottery information storage area 106g of the RAM 106 is executed. As shown in FIG. 74, the lottery information storage area 106g includes a storage area RE and an execution area AE. The storage area RE is composed of a plurality of storage areas, and includes a first storage area RE1 to a tenth storage area RE10.

In the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10, when the acquisition condition of the AT counter is satisfied, the AT counter is in the order of the first storage area RE1 → the second storage area RE2 → the third storage area RE3 .... Is stored in chronological order. By having 10 storage areas as a plurality of storage areas, up to 10 random numbers for lottery used for the AT mode transition lottery are stored.

In step S3205, the value of the AT counter acquired in step S3204 is stored in the area (younger area) having the smallest number among the empty areas in the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10. For example, when the value of the AT counter is stored in each area of the first storage area RE1 to the ninth storage area RE9 and the tenth storage area RE10 is an empty area, in step S3205, it is acquired in step S3204. The value of the AT counter is stored in the tenth storage area RE10.

The configuration is not limited to storing the AT counter value as it is, and may be a configuration in which information corresponding to the AT counter value is stored. For example, the AT counter value is converted into an AT mode lottery value. It may be configured to be stored after the operation.

In step S3206, the process of setting the AT command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the random number acquisition process is terminated. The AT command includes information corresponding to the value of the AT counter stored this time and information corresponding to the value of the AT counter stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10. Therefore, the display control device 81 can grasp the information of each storage area RE1 to RE10 in the lottery information storage area 106g by receiving the AT command.

The above random number acquisition process is activated regardless of the lottery result of each game, and the AT counter is acquired regardless of the lottery result of each game. That is, the AT counter is acquired independently of the lottery result of the game at the time of acquisition.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a lottery result correspondence process in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the random number shift process for updating the storage area of the AT counter acquired by the random number acquisition process for each game in which the AT mode transition lottery can be executed is performed. It is different from the lottery result handling process. That is, in steps S3301 to S3303, similarly to steps S601 to S603, a process of determining whether or not the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the gaming state is executed, and then a random number is executed in step S3304. Execute shift processing. After executing the random number shift process, in steps S3305-step S3313, similarly to the above steps S604 to S612, as the process related to the instruction function, the process for the advantageous section transition, the process for the AT mode, and the push order Performs notification processing, etc.

<Random number shift processing>
The random number shift process in step S3304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3401, among the storage areas RE1 to RE10, the lottery random number information (information corresponding to the AT counter) stored in the first storage area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the first 1 Performs a process of clearing the random number information stored in the storage area RE1. The execution area AE is an area for storing random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery when the AT mode transition lottery is performed in this game. Then, at the time of the AT mode transition lottery, the information corresponding to the AT counter stored in the execution area AE is acquired as the random number information used in the current AT mode transition lottery. That is, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information shifted to the execution area AE among the information of the AT counter acquired in advance.

In the following step S3402, a process of shifting the information stored in each of the storage areas RE2 to RE10 to the lower area side is performed. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the first storage area RE1 and the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is cleared, and in order, the third storage area RE3 → The information in each area is shifted in the order of the second storage area RE2, the fourth storage area RE4 → the third storage area RE3 ... the tenth storage area RE10 → the ninth storage area RE9. In this case, the information is only shifted from the 10th storage area RE10 to the 9th storage area RE9, and new information is not shifted. That is, the information in the 10th storage area RE10 is cleared, and the 10th storage area RE10 becomes an empty area.

In the following step S3403, the process of setting the shift command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the random number shift process is terminated. The shift command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the shift of the AT counter has been performed.

Next, the AT lottery process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77.

In the present embodiment, first, the process for the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S3501 to S3505, and then the process for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S3506 to S3518.

Here, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity described in the first embodiment is not set, and the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won. The configuration (step S1313) at which the advantageous section ends is also not set. That is, as shown in FIG. 78, in the section display second process in the present embodiment, the process in the advantageous section is executed in steps S3601 to S3607 in the same manner as in steps S1301 to S1307, and then in step S3608. It is determined whether or not the forced termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S3609 to S3611 in the same manner as in steps S1309 to S1311. .. If the forced termination condition is not satisfied, it is determined in step S3612 whether or not the AT mode end flag is set, and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S3609 to execute the process for ending the advantageous section. To do. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the section display second process is terminated as it is.

Further, as for the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery in the present embodiment, the lottery mode is defined by the mode transition table and the advantageous section game number AG as in the modification 1 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, the mode transition table in the present embodiment is the second mode transition table on the low probability side according to the value of the advantageous section game number AG, similarly to the mode transition table of the modification 1 in the first embodiment. One mode and the second mode on the high probability side are set respectively. In the present embodiment, the last two digits of the value of the advantageous section game number AG and the lottery mode are associated with each other. More specifically, for example, in the mode transition table of the address information M0001, the advantageous section game If the last two digits of the number AG are 1 to 59, the first mode is set, and if the last two digits are 60 to 99, the second mode is set. Also in this embodiment, more specifically about the mode transition table in which a plurality of types are set, there may be a case where the mode is the first mode and a case where the mode is the second mode regardless of the value of the number of advantageous section games AG. As described above, each mode transition table is set. That is, it is set so that the type of the lottery mode is not determined only by the number of advantageous section games AG. Further, the mode transition table in the present embodiment is also set to include at least a section that is the second mode, and the mode transition table that is the first mode is not set regardless of the value of the advantageous section game number AG. .. On the other hand, in the mode transition table of the address information MXXXX, the advantageous section game number AG is set to the second mode with all the values of 1 to 99, and the mode transition table does not include the section which is the first mode. It has become.

The mode transition table is updated every predetermined number of games, and in the present embodiment, it is updated every 100 games after the transition to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section transition game process performed in the advantageous section transition game in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the lottery process of the mode transition table is executed in step S3701. In the following step S3702, a process of storing the address information of the determined mode transition table in the address information storage area 106f is executed based on the processing result of step S3701. After that, in step S3703, a process of setting the table command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. Then, in step S3704, after executing the process of inputting 100 to the mode transition trigger counter of the various counter areas 106e, the process for the advantageous section transition game is terminated. The mode transition trigger counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the lottery trigger of the mode transition table, and is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted, and when it becomes 0, the lottery trigger of the mode transition table occurs. There is. That is, in this embodiment, the mode transition table can be updated not only at the time of transition to the advantageous section but also every time 100 games are exhausted.

In the lottery trigger determination process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79 (b), first, in step S3711, the mode transition trigger counter subtraction process set in step S3704 is executed. Then, in step S3712, it is determined whether or not the mode transition trigger counter becomes 0. When it becomes 0, the process of setting the mode transition trigger flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S3713. Then, in step S3714, 100 is input to the mode transition trigger counter, and then the lottery trigger determination process ends. If the mode transition trigger counter is not 0 in step S3712, it is determined in step S3715 whether or not the mode transition trigger counter is 5, and if it is not 5, the lottery trigger determination process is terminated as it is. .. If the mode transition trigger counter is 5, the process of setting the notification restriction command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3716, and then the lottery trigger determination process ends. The notification restriction command will be described in detail later.

Now, returning to the description of the AT lottery process, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned mode transition trigger flag is set. If the mode transition trigger flag is set, the process of clearing the mode transition trigger flag is executed in step S3502. Then, in step S3503, the lottery process of the mode transition table is executed in the same manner as in step S3701. After that, in step S3504, the address information of the mode transition table is stored based on the processing result of step S3503, and in step S3505, the table command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, or after the process of step S3505 is executed, a process of grasping the current mode transition table is executed in step S3506. Then, in step S3507, the number of advantageous section games AG is grasped, and from these mode transition tables and the number of advantageous section games AG, it is determined in step S3508 whether or not the current lottery mode is the first mode. In the first mode, the process of acquiring the first AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S3509, and in the second mode, the various table storage areas are executed in step S3510. The process of acquiring the second AT mode transition lottery table from 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 81, the values of the AT counters that win the AT mode transition lottery are determined in the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table according to the lottery result of each game. Has been done. For example, in the first AT mode transition lottery table, when the lottery result of the game is normal lip A, if the AT counter is 128, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and if the AT counter is 1-127, it is not won. Become. Further, when the lottery result of the game is chance B, if the AT counter is 1 to 8, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and if the AT counter is 9 to 128, the game is not won.

On the other hand, in the second AT mode transition lottery table, the types of AT counter values associated with the lottery results of each game are set to be larger than those in the first AT mode transition lottery table. ing. For example, in the second AT mode transition lottery table, when the lottery result of the game is normal lip A, when the AT counter is not only 128 but also 1 to 4, the AT mode transition lottery is won and the AT counter is 5 to 127. If so, it will not be won. Further, when the lottery result of the game is chance B, the AT mode transition lottery is won when the AT counter is not only 1 to 8 but also 9 to 64, and when the AT counter is 65 to 128, it is not won.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S3509 or step S3510, the game lottery result is grasped in step S3511, and in step S3512,
The process of acquiring the information corresponding to the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE in the above random number shift process as the random number information used in the current AT mode transition lottery is executed.

Then, in step S3513, the AT mode transition lottery is executed, and in step S3514, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If winning, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S3515, the process of setting the AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3516, and then this The AT lottery process is completed. When it is determined in step S3514 that the game is not won, it is determined in step S3517 whether or not the lottery result of the game used for the AT mode transition lottery this time is a specific role as a so-called rare role. If it is a specific combination, the process of setting the trigger non-winning command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3518, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. If it is not a specific role, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing on the display control device 81 side in this embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, as compared with the first embodiment, the processing configuration for notifying the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery and the processing configuration for executing the result notification effect of the AT mode transition lottery are different. In addition, a processing configuration for notifying the AT counter to be acquired in advance as described above has been added.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, in the start-time effect setting process in the present embodiment, the configuration of the AT lottery mode notification process (step S3808) and the configuration for executing the result notification effect of the AT mode transition lottery. (Steps S3809 to S3810) are different from the first embodiment, and in the present embodiment, after performing the process for executing the result notification effect of the AT mode transition lottery, other Before executing the start-time effect setting process (step S3812), a hold display process for notifying the pre-acquired AT counter is added in step S3811.

Further, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 83, in the all-stop effect setting process in the present embodiment, the configuration of the lottery trigger notification process (step S3905) and the configuration of the special notification process (step S3906) are the above-mentioned first steps. It is different from the first embodiment, and in the present embodiment, after executing the process for setting the AT end notification effect (step S3902) and the special notification process (step S3906), the other all-stop effect setting process Before executing (step S3908), in step S3907, a hold shift process for notifying the pre-acquired AT counter is added.

<Process for hold display>
First, the hold display process executed in step S3811 of the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. If the AT mode is in progress, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the AT mode, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not the AT command is received. If the AT command has not been received, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If the AT command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4003. As described above, the case of receiving the AT command is the case where it is determined in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 73) on the main control device 101 side that the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the gaming state.

In step S4003, based on the information included in the received AT command, the information of the AT counter corresponding to each storage area RE1 to RE10 is stored in the holding information storage area of the RAM 183. Although detailed description by drawing is omitted, the holding information storage area on the display control device 81 side has the same configuration as the lottery information storage area 106g on the main control device 101 side, and is for 10 games (AT mode). Each storage area (1st storage area to 10th storage area) can be stored so that the AT counter information of the transition lottery (10 times) can be stored, and the AT counter information of the game subject to the AT mode transition lottery can be stored. It has an execution area to store. In step S4003, the information of the AT counter of the first storage area RE1 on the main control device 101 side is stored in the first storage area in the holding information storage area based on the received AT command, and the second storage area RE2 is stored. The information of the AT counter of the above is stored in the second storage area in the holding information storage area ... The information of the AT counter of the tenth storage area RE10 is stored in the tenth storage area of the holding information storage area, and the execution area AE Performs a process of storing the AT counter information of the above in the execution area in the hold information storage area.

In the following step S4004, a hold display lottery process is performed. The hold display lottery process is a lottery process in which the auxiliary display unit 65 determines whether or not the display corresponding to the AT counter acquired at this acquisition opportunity is performed.

Here, the hold display performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

As shown in FIG. 85A, a hold display area Dr is set in the lower part as a predetermined display area in the auxiliary display unit 65. The hold display area Dr is partitioned so that the same number of unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr10 as the maximum number of AT counters stored in the hold information storage area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the hold display area Dr includes the first unit hold display area Dr1, the second unit hold display area Dr2, the third unit hold display area Dr3, the fourth unit hold display area Dr4, and the fifth unit hold display area Dr4. Dr5, the 6th unit hold display area Dr6, the 7th unit hold display area Dr7, the 8th unit hold display area Dr8, the 9th unit hold display area Dr9, and the 10th unit hold display area Dr10 are set. Further, on the left side of the hold display area Dr (the left side of the first unit hold display area Dr1), the AT counter stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area is held and displayed next to the hold display area Dr. The execution display area Dp for this purpose is set. The execution display area Dp is divided as an area larger than each unit hold display area Dr1 to Dr10, and is used for the hold display for the AT mode transition lottery of the game and the AT mode transition lottery after the game. It is possible for the player to clearly distinguish the hold display from the display.

As shown in FIG. 85B, the first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 are set as the hold display to be displayed in the execution display area Dp or the hold display area Dr. The first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 have a display mode corresponding to the value of the AT counter. If the AT counter is 1 to 4, the first special image P1 is displayed and the AT counter is 5 to 5. If it is 8, the second special image P2 is displayed, if the AT counter is 9 to 64, the third special image P3 is displayed, if the AT counter is 65 to 94, the fourth special image P4 is displayed, and AT. If the counter is 95 to 127, the fifth special image P5 is displayed, and if the AT counter is 128, the sixth special image P6 is displayed.

These first special images P1 to 6th special images P6 are set so that the characters, colors, and the like displayed so that the player can identify each other are different. In FIG. 85A, the second special image P2 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, the fifth special image P5 is displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3, and the eighth unit hold display area Dr8. The sixth special image P6 is displayed, the first special image P1 is displayed in the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by using the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE and the lottery result of the game. In this case, for example, if the first special image P1 is a game displayed in the execution display area Dp and the game is the first mode, chance eyes A to chance eyes C, cherries A to cherries C, and so on. If any of the watermelons is used, the AT mode transition lottery will be won, and if not, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won (FIG. 81 (a)). Further, for example, if the sixth special image P6 is a game displayed in the execution display area Dp and the game is in the second mode, normal rip A to normal rip C, chance eyes C, cherry C, If either the common bell or the push order bell is used, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and if not, the AT mode transition lottery is not won (FIG. 81 (b)).

Returning to the description of the hold display process, the hold display lottery process performed in step S4004 is the hold display corresponding to the AT counter acquired this time among the AT commands received this time (basically, the 10th unit hold display area). A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the hold display corresponding to Dr10). Regarding the winning probability of such a lottery, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the display lottery is won and the hold display is displayed with a probability of about one-fifth. In this case, the winning probability is set so that the winning probability of the hold display lottery is larger than the reciprocal of the number of the plurality of unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr10, and the unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr10 have a plurality of units. At least one (two in the above probability) is set as a probability that the hold display is displayed on average.

After executing the process of step S4004, it is determined in step S4005 whether or not the hold display lottery has been won. If it is not won, the hold display process is terminated as it is, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, a process of reading the image data corresponding to the special image corresponding to the AT counter acquired at this acquisition trigger from the ROM 182 is executed. Then, in step S4007, a process of displaying the special image corresponding to the read image data in the unit hold display area corresponding to the AT counter acquired at this acquisition trigger is executed. More specifically, the AT counter acquired this time is stored in the youngest free area (basically the 10th storage area) among the free areas of the hold information storage area, and the unit corresponding to the stored area. The auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that a special image corresponding to the current AT counter is displayed in the hold display area (basically, the 10th unit hold display area Dr10). After executing the process of step S4007, the hold display process is terminated as it is.

<Process for hold shift>
Next, the hold shift process for shifting the area for displaying the hold display started as described above according to the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 101. If the shift command has not been received, the hold shift process is terminated as it is. As described above, the shift command is a command output in the random number shift process when the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state in the lottery result corresponding process on the main control device 101 side.

When the shift command is received, the process of clearing the hold display of the execution display area Dp is performed in step S4102. More specifically, when a special image as a hold display is displayed in the execution display area Dp, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so as to erase the special image, and the special image is displayed in the execution display area Dp. If it is not displayed, keep it in that state. Then, in step S4103, a process of shifting the hold display of the first unit hold display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp is performed. More specifically, when the hold display of the special image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, the hold display is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the first unit hold display area is displayed. The auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so as to erase the hold display displayed on Dr1, and when the hold display is not displayed on the first unit hold display area Dr1, the state is maintained. In the following step S4104, a process of shifting the hold display of each unit hold display area to a lower display area is performed. More specifically, the hold display of the special image displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, and the hold display displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 is displayed. Erase, in order, 3rd unit hold display area Dr3 → 2nd unit hold display area Dr2, 4th unit hold display area Dr4 → 3rd unit hold display area Dr3 ... 10th unit hold display area Dr10 → 9th unit The hold display of each unit hold display area is shifted, such as in the hold display area Dr9. In this case, for the unit hold display area in which the hold display is not performed, the state in which the hold display is not performed is shifted to the lower unit hold display area as it is. Then, the hold display is only shifted from the 10th unit hold display area Dr10 to the 9th unit hold display area Dr9, and the new hold display is not shifted. That is, the hold display of the 10th unit hold display area Dr10 is cleared, and the hold display of the 10th unit hold display area Dr10 is not performed. If the shift command has not been received in step S4101, or after the process of step S4104 has been executed, the hold shift process ends.

<Relationship between AT mode transition lottery and hold display>
A state in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the AT counter acquired in advance will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

87 (a1) and 87 (b1) show the hold display area Dr and the execution display area Dp in the auxiliary display unit 65 in the situation before the start of the game (at the start). 87 (b1) shows the storage area RE and the execution area AE in the lottery information storage area 106g. For example, "73" is stored in the execution area AE as information corresponding to the AT counter, and the fourth special image P4 is displayed as a hold display corresponding to the AT counter in the execution display area Dp. Further, as a random number used for the AT mode transition lottery of the next game, "35" is stored in the first storage area RE1 as information corresponding to the AT counter, and the first unit hold display area Dr1 corresponds to the AT counter. The third special image P3 is displayed as a hold display. In this situation, the case where the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game and the watermelon is won in the lottery process of the next game will be described.

When the number of bets in this game is a specific specified number according to the game state, random number shift processing and hold shift processing are performed based on the operation of the start lever 41. 87 (a2) and 87 (b2) show a situation in which the AT counter information and the hold display are shifted by one game from the situation of FIGS. 87 (a1) and 87 (b1). The AT counter information stored in the storage area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the third special image P3 displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp. Further, in FIGS. 87 (a1) and 87 (b2), as a result of performing the random number shift process and the hold shift process, the tenth storage area RE10 and the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 become empty areas. Shown.

As described above, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information of the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE, the information of the lottery result of this game, and the AT mode transition lottery table. As the AT mode transition lottery table, a first AT mode transition lottery table on the low probability side and a second AT mode transition lottery table on the high probability side are set. In this case, when the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter (35) shifted to the execution area AE in FIG. 87 (a2) is performed, the AT mode transition lottery table for the first is not won and the second AT mode transition lottery is performed. You will win at the AT mode transition lottery table (Fig. 81).

As described above, in the game in which the watermelon is won (the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is won), when the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed, as shown in FIG. 88, the watermelon wins. Can hold. The random number acquisition process is performed based on the third stop OFF operation, and in FIG. 88B, the AT counter for the tenth storage area RE10 is performed based on the third stop OFF operation for establishing the watermelon winning. Indicates that the acquisition of Then, by storing the AT counter in the tenth storage area RE10, as shown in FIG. 88A, the sixth special image P6 as a hold display corresponding to the AT counter can be displayed.

As described above, in the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter acquired in advance, the hold display corresponding to the AT counter is displayed, so that the lottery of the game that can win the AT mode transition lottery is performed. It is possible to proceed with the game after grasping the contents of the result in advance. Then, for example, the sixth special image P6 corresponding to the normal combination such as the normal lip A to the normal lip C, the common bell, and the push order bell is displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3 as the hold display corresponding to after three games. If it is a situation, it is possible to play games between 3 games with the hope that the normal role will be won after 3 games instead of 1 game or 2 games, and the fun of each game will be greatly improved. To do. In this case, when the sixth special image P6 is displayed as described above, in the first mode on the low probability side, only the normal combination corresponds to the AT mode transition winning, but the second on the high probability side. If it is a mode, in addition to the normal role, Cherry C and Chance C also correspond to the AT mode transition winning.

In particular, the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 are displayed for normal roles such as normal lip A to normal lip C and push order bell, which have a high probability of winning in each game in the non-internal state or the internal state. In the case of the first mode, none of the normal combinations correspond to the AT mode transition winning, but in the second mode, if it is the first special image P1, none of the normal winning combinations are AT mode transition winning. In the case of the second special image P2, among the normal roles, the push order bell corresponds to the AT mode transition winning.

As described above, the pre-acquisition and shift of the AT counter are executed when the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the gaming state, and when the number is not the specified specified number, the pre-acquisition of the AT counter is performed. And shift execution is restricted. On the other hand, the first mode and the second mode in the present embodiment are defined by the number of advantageous section games AG, and the number of bets in the transition between the first mode and the second mode is a specific specified number according to the gaming state. It occurs regardless of whether or not it is. That is, by playing the game in a restricted state with a bet other than the specified number, it is possible to cause a transition between the first mode and the second mode while holding the pre-acquired AT counter.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned first special image P1 and second special image P2 are hold displays displayed when the value of the AT counter is 1 to 8, and are acquired and held display with a probability of 8/128. Since it is displayed when the lottery (50%) is won, it can be said that the appearance rate is relatively lower than other special images. Then, if the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter corresponding to the first special image P1 or the second special image P2 can be received, the AT mode transition lottery by the AT counter is executed in the second mode. There is a merit that the game is played in a restricted state in which the shift of the AT counter is restricted until the game is played. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game property is realized in which the player is made to judge whether or not to play the game in the restricted state in relation to the hold display.

<Process for AT lottery mode notification>
FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the AT lottery mode notification process according to the present embodiment.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not a table command has been received. As described above, the table command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the mode transition table is updated in the advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 79) or the AT lottery process (FIG. 77). Is. When the table command is received, the process of storing the address information of the mode transition table in the address information storage area 183c is executed in step S4202. In the following step S4203, a process of adding 1 to the table update counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The table update counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of consecutive times when the mode transition table is updated without winning the AT mode transition lottery. In the following step S4204, a process of clearing the notification restriction flag provided in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed.

The notification restriction flag is a flag for restricting the execution of the suggestion effect when the suggestion effect of the lottery mode is performed. The notification restriction flag is set when a notification declaration command output from the main control device 101 is received when the mode transition trigger counter becomes 5. That is, as shown in FIG. 89B, in the notification restriction process performed as one process of the other all-stop effect setting process (step S1808) in the all-stop effect setting process in the present embodiment, step S4211 Determines whether or not the notification restriction command has been received, and if so, sets the notification restriction flag in step S4212. When a negative determination is made in step S4211, or after the process of step S4212 is executed, the notification restriction process ends. The process for restricting the execution of the suggestion effect of the lottery mode when the notification restriction flag is set will be described in detail later. If the notification restriction flag is not set in step S4204, that state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step S4201, or after the process of step S4204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4205 to determine whether or not a non-winning command has been received. As described above, the trigger non-winning command in the present embodiment is the main control device 101 when the lottery result of the game used for the AT mode transition lottery is a specific combination and the AT mode transition lottery is not won. This is the command output from. When the trigger non-winning command is received, the process of adding 1 to the trigger through counter is executed in step S4206. The trigger through counter in the present embodiment is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of consecutive times in which the AT mode transition lottery using a specific combination is not won.

If a negative determination is made in step S4205, or after the process of step S4206 is executed, it is determined in step S4207 whether or not the AT winning notification command is received. When the AT winning notification command is received, the process of clearing the table update counter and the trigger through counter to 0 is executed in step S4208, and then the AT lottery mode notification process is terminated. If the AT winning notification command has not been received in step S4207, the AT lottery mode notification process is terminated as it is.

<Processing for notification of lottery opportunity>
In the lottery opportunity notification process in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the process for notifying that the number of bets is not a specific specified number according to the game state but a restricted state is executed. ..

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 90, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-bet game, and if it is a 3-bet game, it is in the first BB state or the second BB state in step S4302. Judge whether or not. If it is a 3-bet game and there is no first BB state or second BB state, the process for notifying the lottery opportunity is terminated as it is. On the other hand, even if it is a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, if it is in the first BB state or the second BB state and is in the restricted state, the random number update restriction notification effect is provided in the auxiliary display unit in step S4303. After executing the setting to be performed by the 65 or the speaker 64, the process for notifying the lottery opportunity is terminated. As a random number update restriction notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), a character display such as "HOLD !!" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify that the restriction state is reached. I do. In the present embodiment, the random number update restriction notification effect will be described as an effect similar to the mode transition restriction notification effect described above, but these effects may be different from each other, and at least each of them may be in a restricted state. Any production may be sufficient so that the player can grasp it.

<Processing for special notification>
In the special notification process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 91, the process of grasping the current mode transition table is executed by referring to the address information storage area 183c in step S4401. In the following step S4402, a process of grasping the advantageous section game number AG is executed based on the received advantageous section game command. Then, in step S4403, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is the second mode. In the case of the first mode instead of the second mode, in step S4404, the effect setting for performing the effect for the first mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. As the effect for the first mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 93A, an effect for displaying the main character in the auxiliary display unit 65 is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4403 that the mode is the second mode, the second mode notification lottery process is executed in step S4405, and if the notification lottery is won (step S4406: YES), the step In S4407, the effect setting for performing the effect for the second mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. As the effect for the second mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), an effect is set to show that the flame burns behind the main character in the auxiliary display unit 65 and the spirit of the main character is increasing. There is.

That is, the player can grasp whether the current state is the first mode or the second mode depending on the presence or absence of the flame behind the main character displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the second mode notification lottery process of step S4405, the second mode notification lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, and the set value set in the winning probability setting process and the table update counter are grasped. Then, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not to execute the second mode production in this game. As shown in FIG. 92A, the second mode notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the second mode notification lottery differs depending on the set value and the table update counter. Specifically, the larger the value of the table update counter, the easier it is to win, and the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. More specifically, in the odd setting, if the value of the table update counter is equal to or more than the predetermined value (2), it is easier to win than the even setting, and in the even setting, if the value of the table update counter is less than the predetermined value. It is set so that it is easier to win than the odd number setting.

If a non-winner is obtained in the second mode notification lottery process in step S4405, the first mode effect setting process is performed in step S4404. In addition, in the case of the second mode, the effect for the second mode may be always performed without executing the second mode notification lottery process.

After executing the process of step S4404 or step S4407, it is determined in step S4408 whether or not the above notification restriction flag is set. If the notification restriction flag is set and there are only 5 games remaining until the mode transition table update game, and then the mode transition table has not been updated, the future in steps S441-10 to S4414. The special notification process is terminated as it is without performing the process for executing the mode prediction effect as the prediction effect of the lottery mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S4408, the prediction notification lottery process is executed in step S4409. In the prediction notification lottery process, whether or not to acquire the prediction notification lottery table from various table storage areas 182a, grasp the table update counter and the trigger through counter, and execute the mode prediction effect in this game. Lottery will be held. As shown in FIG. 92B, the prediction notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the prediction notification lottery differs depending on the table update counter and the trigger through counter. Specifically, the larger the value of the table update counter, the easier it is to win, and the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the easier it is to win.

In step S4410, it is determined in the lottery process of step S4409 whether or not the player has won, and if not, the special notification process ends as it is. If the game is won, the process proceeds to step S4411, and by grasping the mode transition table and the number of advantageous section games AG, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode update trigger game is after the predetermined number of games (5 games). To do. The update trigger game is a game in which the update from the first mode to the second mode is performed or a game in which the update from the second mode to the first mode is performed, and specifically, under the advantageous section game number AG. This is a game in which the two digits are 01, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 (Fig. 80). If the update trigger game is not after 5 games, the special notification process is terminated as it is. In the case of the update trigger game, in step S4412, by grasping the mode transition table and the advantageous section game number AG, it is determined whether or not the second mode is updated after 5 games. When updating to the first mode instead of the second mode, in step S4413, after executing the effect setting for performing the first mode prediction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64, this special notification is used. End the process. As the first mode prediction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), an effect of displaying a candle character with extinguished flame in an area different from the area where the main character is displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65. Is set.

When it is determined in step S4412 that the second mode is updated after the predetermined number of games, in step S4414, the effect setting for performing the second mode prediction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. From, the processing for this special notification is terminated. As the second mode prediction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), an effect of displaying a candle character with a burning flame in a region different from the region where the main character is displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 is provided. It is set.

<Game flow and hold display>
The relationship between the flow of the game using the game in the restricted state and the hold display will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. FIG. 95 shows the flow of the game when the game in the restricted state is not performed, and FIG. 96 shows the flow of the game when the game is played in the restricted state.

In FIG. 95A, for example, the first special image P1 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, and the fifth special image P5 is displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3 and the fifth unit hold display area Dr5. The first mode is between three games including this game (the last two digits of the value of the number of advantageous section games AG are 17 to 19), and the fourth and subsequent games (the value of the number of advantageous section games AG). The last two digits are 20 to 29) indicating the situation in which the second mode is set.

When such a situation is played in a 3-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery also shifts along with the count of the number of advantageous section games AG, and is further stored in the lottery information storage area 106 g. The AT counter is also shifted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), when one game progresses from the situation of FIG. 95 (a), the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1 becomes the execution display area Dp. This game will be an AT mode transition lottery in the first mode. In this case, if the specific combination is won as a so-called rare combination, which is the lottery result corresponding to the AT counters 1 to 4 corresponding to the first special image P1 in the first mode, the AT mode transition lottery is won, but other If it is the result of the lottery, it will not be won in the AT mode transition lottery.

When one game progresses from the situation of FIG. 95 (b), as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the first mode ends in this game, and the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode is performed from the next game. Will be. Then, when one game progresses from the situation of FIG. 95 (c), as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the AT mode transition lottery in the first mode is performed from this game. The fifth special image P5 is shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the AT counter corresponding to the fifth special image P5 in the second mode is the chance eye C or cherry which is the lottery result corresponding to 95 to 127. If C is won, the AT mode transition lottery is won, but if it is another lottery result, the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

FIG. 96 (a) shows the same situation as in FIG. 95 (a). However, in the situation shown in FIG. 96A, for example, as shown in FIG. 97A, the second mode prediction effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in FIG. 97A, the effect for the first mode is also executed corresponding to the current lottery mode. By the way, in this figure, the special notification as the mode prediction notification after the predetermined number of games is shown as the mode prediction notification after the number of three games. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery at the AT counter corresponding to the first special image P1 waiting for the next game is executed in the first mode on the low probability side, and after three games, the first on the high probability side. It is understood from the first mode effect and the second mode prediction effect that the two modes are set.

Therefore, FIG. 96B shows a case where the game is switched to the 2-bet game and one game progresses in the restricted state. In this case, the number of games remaining until the lottery mode is switched as well as the count of the advantageous section game number AG While proceeding, the shift of the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is restricted. As a result, the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1 in FIG. 96A is maintained in the first unit hold display area Dr1 even if one game progresses. In this case, as shown in FIG. 97B, the random number update restriction notification effect is executed, and the player can grasp that the hold display is not shifted. However, since the current lottery mode is still the first mode, the main character who does not wear the flame is displayed, and the effect for the first mode is executed.

When one game progresses from FIG. 96 (b) in a further restricted state, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), the first mode is up to this game, and the second mode is set from the next game. However, since it is in the restricted state as described above, the AT counter is not shifted, and the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1 is not shifted. Then, when one game is further advanced in the restricted state, the lottery mode becomes the second mode as shown in FIG. 97 (d).

When the lottery mode becomes the second mode and, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the effect for the second mode is executed, the next game is played in a 3-bet game instead of a 2-bet game. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the game is in the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode. Will be executed.

Here, the effect for the second mode is configured to be executed when the second mode is in the second mode and the second mode notification lottery process is won. Therefore, when the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode, the second mode effect may not be performed in the game in which the mode shift occurs. Further, the second mode prediction effect is also configured to be executed when the second mode is after the predetermined game and the prediction notification lottery is won. Therefore, the second mode prediction effect may not be performed in the game before the predetermined game that shifts to the second mode. However, the prediction notification lottery is executed regardless of the lottery mode after the predetermined game, but if the prediction notification lottery is won, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the prediction notification lottery is the first mode or the second mode. However, it can be said that the notification has higher reliability than the production for the first mode and the production for the second mode. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the second mode prediction effect occurs in the situation of FIG. 96 (a), at least under the advantageous section game number AG after the predetermined game of the game. In a game in which the two digits are 22, the player can predict that the lottery mode is the second mode even if the effect for the second mode has not occurred.

In other words, rather than a player who tries to grasp the lottery mode by the production for the first mode and the production for the second mode, he tries to grasp the lottery mode by counting the number of games from the game in which the second mode prediction production occurs. Players will be more confident of the transition to the second mode in faster games. Therefore, it is possible to immerse more in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the second mode prediction effect and ensuring the superiority of having a high degree of understanding of the game content and the effect content.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter acquired in advance and the game lottery result, and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is allowed to be a 3-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state. While the configuration is such that a transition can occur in both the game and the restricted game such as a non-internal state or an internal state 2-bet game or a BB state, the AT counter is updated (shifted, acquired) in the allowable game. , The AT counter is not updated in the restricted game. By doing so, when the pre-acquired AT counter is provided to the AT mode transition lottery, the update of the AT counter is restricted in the restricted game until the lottery mode becomes the second mode on the high probability side. It is possible to perform a game such as letting. That is, there are a first mode on the low probability side and a second mode on the high probability side as the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery, and the value of the AT counter that wins the AT mode transition with respect to the lottery result of the game in each mode. (Correspondence information) is defined, and the game is made to stand by in the restricted game until the AT counter acquired in advance becomes the correspondence information as the value of the AT counter that wins the AT mode transition. By doing so, a novel game such as deciding whether to proceed with the allowable game or the restricted game by using the relationship between the AT counter acquired in advance and the corresponding information. It becomes possible to realize the sex.

Also in the present embodiment, in order to switch from the permissible game to the restricted game, it is sufficient to switch from the 3-bet game to the 2-bet game or to generate a BB prize. By making it possible to switch to the restricted game, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the AT mode transition lottery or the update of the AT counter is unintentionally restricted.

In this case, since the AT counter information acquired in advance can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a hold display, it is decided whether or not to switch to the restricted game from the contents of the hold display. It becomes possible. Moreover, by switching to the restricted game, the random number update restriction notification effect is performed and the shift of the hold display itself is also restricted, so that it becomes clearer that the restricted game is being performed. By doing so, for example, when a game is played by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45, the player accidentally starts the game when two medals are inserted instead of three. If the restricted game is unintentionally switched to the 2-bet game, it becomes easier to notice it, and the manager of the game hall can easily identify that the restricted game is being performed.

Furthermore, as a special notification suggesting the current lottery mode, the effect for the first mode and the effect for the second mode are executed. Therefore, the AT counter acquired in advance after grasping the current lottery mode. It is possible to predict a game that will be the corresponding information corresponding to the lottery mode, and to adjust the limited game and the allowable game.

As a special notification suggesting a future lottery mode, if there is a game in which the transition from the second mode to the first mode occurs ahead of the predetermined number of games, the second mode prediction effect is executed and the predetermined number of games ahead. When there is a game in which the transition from the first mode to the second mode occurs, the second mode prediction effect is executed. By doing so, after grasping the lottery mode of the predetermined number of games ahead, the pre-acquired AT counter predicts the game that becomes the corresponding information corresponding to the lottery mode, and the restricted game and the allowable game are used. It is possible to make adjustments.

In this case, the special notification suggesting the current lottery mode and the special notification suggesting the future lottery mode match the contents of the special notification suggesting the future lottery mode with the actual lottery mode. It is highly likely that it is present, and it is set to be highly reliable. That is, regarding the special notification suggesting the current lottery mode, there is a possibility that it is the second mode even if the effect for the first mode is performed, and even if the special notification is performed, any lottery is performed. It may not be certain if you are staying in mode. On the other hand, regarding the special notification suggesting the future lottery mode, it is confirmed that the transition to the first mode will occur if the first mode prediction effect is performed, and the second mode prediction effect is performed if the second mode prediction effect is performed. It is confirmed that the transition to the mode will occur. Therefore, if the transition of the lottery mode is to be specified in an earlier game, the first mode prediction effect and the second mode prediction effect are earlier specified than the first mode effect and the second mode effect. Contribution is high. By doing so, it is possible to suitably enhance the fun of the game of switching between the restricted game and the allowable game by the pre-acquired AT counter and the advance grasp of the transition of the lottery mode.

Since the special notifications such as the first mode effect, the second mode effect, the first mode prediction effect, and the second mode prediction effect can be executed regardless of whether the game is a permissible game or a restricted game, the permissible game It is possible to determine the timing of switching to the restricted game during the restricted game, and it is possible to determine the timing of switching to the allowable game during the restricted game.

In the second embodiment, the occurrence rate of the special notification in the allowable game and the occurrence rate of the special notification in the limited game are the same, but different occurrence rates may be used. For example, the limited game However, the configuration may be such that special notification is more likely to occur than the allowable game. In the restricted game, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. Therefore, if the occurrence rate of the special notification is low, the consumption of the AT counter is restricted until the lottery mode becomes the desired lottery mode in the restricted game. In spite of this, there is a possibility that the player wants to receive the AT mode transition lottery and switches to the allowable game before the desired lottery mode is reached due to the numbness. In that respect, by increasing the occurrence rate of the special notification in the restricted game, it is possible to calm the player's impatience and preferably perform the game in which the consumption of the AT counter is made to wait until the desired lottery mode is reached. ..

Since the present embodiment has a configuration in which the lottery mode is determined by using the mode transition table and the advantageous section game number AG, the AT counter set so as to win the AT mode transition for each lottery result of the game. It can be said that the corresponding information as the value of is different depending on the number of games in the advantageous section AG. By doing so, for example, when the player grasps the mode transition table this time from the table notification effect on the mode transition table as in the first embodiment, after the transition to the advantageous section occurs. While considering the number of games and the number of games since the mode transition table has been updated, it is possible to play limited games up to games in which the pre-acquired AT counter is likely to be the corresponding information. That is, it is also possible to grasp whether or not the AT counter is likely to be the corresponding information from the pre-acquired AT counter and the number of games, and the game is played in the limited game until the game is likely to be the corresponding information. It is possible to realize a novel playability such as.

Here, although the number of games in the advantageous section can be grasped by the presence or absence of the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display, in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section transition game and the eighth display Since the display start game of the segment N8 does not match (the display is started when the AT mode shifts), it is difficult to grasp the number of games after the shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, as described above, the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section (the number of games after the mode transition table is set) and the relationship between the AT counter acquired in advance are used to allow limited games. It can be said that the number of games itself is difficult to understand when switching to a game. By doing so, it becomes difficult to clearly specify when to switch between the restricted game and the allowable game, the fun of the game that determines the switching timing is increased, and attention is paid to the special notification that suggests the lottery mode. The degree is also increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the mode transition table is updated every predetermined game (100 games) after the transition to the advantageous section, it is assumed that the mode transition table that is not preferable for the player is set. However, once the predetermined game is digested, there is a desire to be updated to a mode transition table different from the unfavorable mode transition table, and even if the unfavorable mode transition table is set, the game is terminated. It is possible to reduce the possibility of spilling.

Here, the mode transition table for each predetermined game is updated on the condition that it is an allowable game, not a restricted game, in the AT lottery process. By doing so, even if the mode transition table is unfavorable, even if the restricted game is being performed, at least if the mode transition table is to be updated, it is necessary to switch to the allowable game. There will be. By doing so, it is possible to preferably prevent the total number of medals inserted from being reduced due to the endless limited game being played.

Since the special notification suggesting the lottery mode is likely to occur as the number of times the mode transition table is updated increases, it can be said that the special notification is likely to occur as the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section increases. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the lottery mode by using the special notification, and then promote the switching between the restricted game and the allowable game to increase the probability of winning the AT mode transition, and the special notification can be sent. It is possible to preferably realize the used ceiling function.

<Modification example 1>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table are different from those of the second embodiment. FIG. 99 is a lottery table for shifting to each AT mode in this modification.

As shown in FIG. 99, when the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table are compared, the lottery results associated with the AT counter values 1 to 4, 5 to 8 are different. The lottery results associated with 9 to 128 as the values of other AT counters are common. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the first AT mode transition lottery table, when the value of the AT counter is 1 to 4, the lottery result excluding the duplicate 1-card combination, BB1 and BB2 may be used. If the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT counter value is 5 to 8, the AT mode transition lottery is won if it is a specific combination. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99B, in the second AT mode transition lottery table, when the value of the AT counter is 1 to 4, if it is a specific combination, the AT mode transition lottery is won. When the value of the AT counter is 5 to 8, if the lottery result excludes the duplicate 1-card combination, BB1 and BB2, the AT mode transition lottery is won.

That is, in this modification, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is common to the first mode and the second mode, but in the first mode, the AT counter value is 1 to 4 and it is easy to win, and the second mode Then, the value of the AT counter is 5 to 8, and it is easy to win. Therefore, although the possibility that the AT counter value (correspondence information) for winning the AT mode transition differs depending on the lottery mode with respect to the lottery result of the game, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery for each game is the same. It will be. Therefore, formally, while keeping the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in each game, the pre-acquired AT counter and the lottery mode transition, and the switching between the restricted game and the allowable game are used. Therefore, it is possible to substantially change the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in each game.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 100A is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process in this modification. As described above, the random number acquisition process is a process performed when all reels are stopped in the reel control process.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106g. If there is an empty area and an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the process for acquiring the AT counter is executed in steps S4502 to S4504, and then the random number acquisition process ends. The processing of steps S4502 to S4504 is the same as the processing of steps S3204 to S3206. If there is no empty area and a negative determination is made in step S4501, the random number acquisition process is terminated as it is.

As described above, when the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state, a random number shift process is executed at the start of the game, and basically the tenth storage area RE10 becomes an empty area. When the negative determination is made in step S4501, for example, the number of bets of the game started in the situation where the information corresponding to the AT counter is stored in the tenth storage area RE10 is a specific specified number according to the gaming state. This is a case where there is no restriction state and the random number shift process is not executed at the start of the game.

On the other hand, for example, in the situation where the information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored in the 10th storage area RE10, the number of bets of the started game is limited to not a specific specified number according to the game state. Yes, even if the random number shift process is not executed at the start of the game, a positive determination is made in step S4501.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the power is turned on, the reset switch 72 is operated, and when the winning probability setting process in the main process is executed, the RAM 106 is initialized. In this case, the information corresponding to each AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is also cleared. That is, immediately after the winning probability setting process is performed, the AT counter is not stored in the lottery information storage area 106g, and the AT mode transition lottery is not performed at least in the first game.

On the other hand, by adopting the above configuration, by playing the game after the winning probability setting process in the 2-bet game, it corresponds to the AT counter without digesting the information corresponding to the AT counter. It is possible to only acquire information. As a result, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation in which the information corresponding to the AT counter in the lottery information storage area 106 g is not stored.

Further, in a configuration in which the second BB winning flag can be cleared at the time of initializing the RAM 106 or the like, when executing a normal game in a situation where the second BB winning is carried over, several 2-bet games are executed. It is necessary to wait for the second BB winning. In that respect, according to the above configuration, since the information corresponding to the AT counter can be acquired even while waiting for the second BB winning, it is possible to simplify the preparatory work for the normal game. Become.

The situation in which the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is deleted is not limited to the initialization process associated with the winning probability setting process, and for example, the advantageous section information performed at the end of the advantageous section. The AT counter may be erased during the initialization process. Even in this case, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the normal section, and the AT counter is not consumed, so that the AT counter can be acquired and the AT counter can be stored.

FIG. 100 (b) shows an allowable state in which the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state and execution of processing related to the instruction function is permitted, a limited state in which the number of bets is not the specified specified number, and the AT mode transition lottery. The relationship between the presence or absence of execution of each process to be performed is shown in comparison between the situation immediately after the initialization of the RAM 106 and the situation not so.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first mode and the second mode as the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery are defined by the mode transition table and the advantageous section game number AG, and the lottery mode is defined as the lottery mode. It is possible to transition to either the acceptable state or the restricted state. The point that the transition of the lottery mode occurs in any state does not change even immediately after the initialization of the RAM 106. However, since the advantageous section flag is cleared by the initialization of the RAM 106, the lottery mode shift occurs after shifting to the advantageous section.

On the other hand, the random number shift process, which is one process in the lottery result handling process, is executed in the allowable state but not in the restricted state. Similarly, regardless of whether or not the RAM 106 has just been initialized, the random number shift process is executed in the allowable state, but not in the restricted state.

The random number acquisition process, which is one process in the reel control process, is executed in the allowable state, but is not executed in the restricted state. However, if there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106g, such as immediately after the initialization of the RAM 106 as described above, the process for acquiring the AT counter in the random number acquisition process is executed even in the restricted state. To. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the situation in which the information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored as described above.

Moreover, in the slot machine 10, the AT counter is configured to be updated in the timer update process (step S108) of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the AT counter is updated not only in the allowable state and the limited state but also in the RAM 106. Executed with or without initialization. By doing so, even in the restricted state immediately after the initialization of the RAM 106, the inconvenience that the AT counter can be acquired but the acquired AT counter remains unupdated does not occur. Therefore, the event that the result of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter acquired in the relevant situation is the same result (both are winning results or both are non-winning results) does not occur, and the player or the game It is possible to prevent the hall from being unduly disadvantaged.

<Other Embodiments>
The description is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration composed of a combination of embodiments and modifications, and some or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In the first embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won, the advantageous section is terminated, but the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won. Even in the case of, the configuration may be such that the advantageous section is not terminated. In this case, after considering the maximum number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games) and the maximum number of games in the advantageous section (2400), the maximum number of games is increased before the maximum number of games is reached when the AT mode is entered. The number of games that will reach the number (for example, 1000 games) minus the number of games until a specific opportunity occurs is the specific number of games (for example, 950 games), and the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won. Therefore, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated.

(2) In a configuration in which the lottery mode transition between the first mode and the second mode is performed through the AT lottery mode transition lottery process, the trigger result and the winning probability of winning each lottery mode transition are not limited to the above. For example, the transition from the second mode to the first mode may be caused not only by the normal combination but also by the specific combination, or the transition from the first mode to the second mode may be caused only by the specific combination. May be good.

(3) Transition of lottery mode Although the execution of the lottery is restricted by the restricted game, it may be configured to be restricted even in the allowable game. For example, when a specific winning combination is won in the second mode, if the execution of the lottery mode transition lottery is restricted over the predetermined number of games, the second mode to the first mode are set during the predetermined number of games. The transition to is restricted, and it is possible to maintain the second mode in the permissible game. In this case, the predetermined number of games may be different depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, in the case of Cherry A, the execution of the transition lottery between 5 games is restricted, and in the case of Cherry B, the transition lottery between 10 games is restricted. A specific role that is difficult to win as a result of the lottery of the game may be configured to limit the transition lottery over a long number of games, such as limiting the execution of.

On the contrary, when the normal winning combination is won in the first mode, the execution of the transition lottery of the lottery mode may be restricted over a predetermined number of games.

(4) In the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity, the winning probability is uniform (10% in the first mode, 60% in the second mode) without considering the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed. However, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery may differ depending on the lottery result of the game and the type of the lottery mode in which the player is staying.

(5) In the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific combination before the specific opportunity, the lottery mode may be added. That is, even if the specific combination is the same, it may be easier to win the AT mode transition lottery when the lottery mode at the time of winning the specific combination is the second mode than when the first mode is set.

(6) Although the AT mode transition lottery is performed by winning the specific combination even before the specific opportunity, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed even if the normal combination is won.

(7) The first BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game. However, only one of the BBs may be used, for example, 2 The second BB may be won in the betting game, and none of the BBs may be won in the 3-bet game.

(8) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won, but in the 2-bet game, a plurality of types of BBs may be won. It may be a structure that can be won. In this case, the first BB prize and the second BB prize can be established in the two-bet game, neither the first BB nor the second BB is won in the three-bet game, and the first BB prize and the second BB prize are obtained in the three-bet game. The configuration may be such that neither of the 2BB prizes is established. The relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be the opposite of that described above.

(9) Although the same lottery table is used in both the first BB state and the second BB state to be the same game base, different lottery tables may be used to be different game bases. Even in this case, it is preferable to make the contribution rate to the execution rate of the special notification different by changing the value to be added to the trigger through counter when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won, which is advantageous. The lower the degree (game base), the larger the value is added to the trigger through counter.

(10) The first BB state and the second BB state are both played in a 3-bet game or both are played in a 2-bet game. For example, the first BB state is played in a 3-bet game and the second BB is played. The state may be configured such that the number of bets differs depending on the type of BB state, such as playing a game in a 2-bet game.

(11) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both restricted games. For example, the games in the first BB state are restricted games, while the games in the second BB state are allowed games. The restricted game and the permissible game may be configured differently depending on the type of BB state, such as. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and any or all of these may be a restricted game or a permissible game.

(12) The game base in the BB state is set to be higher than the game base in the 2-bet game, but at least the game base in the BB state should be higher than the game base in the 3-bet game. It may be lower than the base.

(13) In the configuration in which the first mode and the second mode are defined in the mode transition table, the number of unit games in which the first mode and the second mode are switched is mainly set as 10 games. The number of unit games in which the first mode and the second mode are switched may be different, such that the number of advantageous section games AG is 1 to 10, 11 to 13, 14 to 55, and so on. In this case, the number of unit games to be switched may be such that different numbers of unit games are repeated, such as the first number, the second number, the first number, and the second number, and the combination of the number of unit games has regularity. It is good to have it.

(14) In the configuration in which the first mode and the second mode are defined in the mode transition table, the number of unit games in which the first mode and the second mode are switched may differ depending on the type of the mode transition table. .. For example, in the first mode transition table (mode transition table of address information MAAAA), the lottery mode is switched depending on the number of unit games of the first number (10 games), while the second mode transition table (address information MBBBBB). In the mode transition table), the lottery mode may be switched depending on the number of unit games of the second number (25 games). Further, the even-numbered game may be in the first mode, the odd-numbered game may be in the second mode, and so on.

(15) The first mode in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is low and the second mode in which the winning probability is high are provided, but the second mode may be superior to the first mode, for example. In the first mode, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity may not be won.

(16) The lottery mode is suggested by the occurrence rate of the special notification suggesting that it is the second mode, but at least it is predictable whether the user is staying in the first mode or the second mode. However, for example, the lottery mode may be suggested by the occurrence rate of the special notification suggesting that the mode is the first mode.

(17) Although multiple types of mode transition tables are provided to determine the mode transition table to be set by lottery, even if a uniform mode transition table is provided or multiple types are provided, the mode transition table to be set has regularity. May exist. For example, after the first mode transition table is set, the table may be easily set or set by the second mode transition. By doing so, it is possible to predict the lottery mode from the information of the uniform or previous mode transition table.

(18) As the mode transition table, a mode transition table associated only with the first mode may be included.

(19) Depending on the type of the set mode transition table, the value to be added to the trigger through counter when the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won may be different. For example, when a mode transition table with many games associated with the second mode is set, the value added to the trigger through counter when the AT mode is not won is increased, so that the player's feeling of loss is notified by special notification. It will be possible to make up for it well.

(20) The value to be added to the trigger through counter when the AT mode is not won is not limited to the information of the game that caused the specific trigger (number of bets, BB state or not, type of BB state, etc.), and other information. May be used to set a value to be added to the trigger through counter. For example, a value to be added may be set using the information of the game before the specific trigger is generated. Specifically, if the game is shifted to the BB state before reaching the specific trigger, the value to be added to the trigger through counter is reduced / increased even if the game that caused the specific trigger is not in the BB state. May be. Further, a value to be added to the trigger through counter may be set according to the number of medals decreased / increased until a specific trigger occurs.

(21) The configuration is such that a specific role can be won even in a 2-bet game, and the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the specific role winning in the 2-bet game, but the specific role may not be won in the 2-bet game. .. Further, the configuration may be such that the specific combination can be won even in the BB state, and the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the specific combination winning in the BB state.

(22) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB prize cannot be established, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB prize cannot be established. However, in the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB prize is more difficult to establish than in the 2-bet game. The configuration may be such that the first BB winning is less likely to be won in the 2-bet game than in the 3-bet game.

(23) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. However, in the 3-bet game, it may be more difficult to win the 2nd BB than in the 2-bet game. In the game, it may be more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(24) When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, if the number of credits is smaller than the value set in the MAX bet counter, the bet may not be placed, or the MAX bet counter may not be satisfied. It may be configured to place a bet according to the number of credits. However, if the latter is used, there is a high possibility that a restricted game will be played unintentionally. Therefore, it is preferable to make a configuration in which no bet is made when the number of credits does not reach the MAX bet counter as in the former. ..

(25) When 3 is set in the MAX bet counter, it is possible to set 2 bets by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 and other operation units, and 2 is set in the MAX bet counter. If so, the configuration may be such that a 3-bet can be set by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 or other operation unit.

(26) An operation unit capable of setting one bet may be provided. In this case, the number of bets may be different according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, if the operation unit is operated once, it may be 1 bet, if it is operated twice, it may be 2 bets, and if it is operated 3 times, it may be 3 bets. Furthermore, even if the desired number of bets is exceeded, such as 1 bet when the operation is performed 4 times and 2 bets when the operation is performed 5 times, the desired number of bets is set by re-operation. It is preferable to have a possible configuration.

(27) The special notification as a suggestion of the lottery mode is not executed in the game in which the re-game is won (the game in which the re-game is won), or even if the configuration is more difficult to execute than the other result-winning game or the out-of-game result game. Good. By winning the re-game, it is necessary to play the game with the same number of bets in the next game of the game, but based on the special notification of the game that won the re-game, the number of bets in the next game is set. This is because even if you try to switch, you cannot do so.

(28) Although the game property of shifting the lottery mode to the second mode before the specific opportunity occurs is explained, a predetermined point can be given in each game until the specific opportunity occurs, and according to the points. The AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on a specific opportunity. The predetermined points may be given according to the lottery result of the game. Then, it is preferable that a predetermined point is given in an allowable game such as a 3-bet game, but a predetermined point is not given in a restricted game such as a 2-bet game.

(29) Although the description has been made on the premise that the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the specific opportunity, the lottery performed based on the specific opportunity is not limited to the AT mode transition lottery. For example, it may be an advantageous section transition lottery, a transition lottery to an additional special zone in AT mode, an additional lottery in AT mode, or a lottery for the number of additional games. Further, it may be an execution lottery for a predetermined effect (for example, a set value suggestion effect).

(30) In a configuration in which a random number for lottery is acquired in advance and a lottery is performed using the random number and the lottery result of each game, the AT counter used for the AT mode transition lottery as the random number for lottery is taken as an example. As described above, the above inventions may be applied to random numbers used in other lottery. For example, it may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used for an advantageous section transition lottery is acquired in advance, or it may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used in an additional special zone transition lottery is acquired in advance. However, it may be applied to the configuration in which the counter for the lottery used for the additional lottery or the number of additional games lottery is acquired in advance, or the counter for the lottery used for the lottery of the predetermined effect (for example, the set value suggestion effect) may be obtained in advance. It may be applied to the configuration to be acquired.

That is, the specific event in which the lottery for the presence or absence of occurrence is performed based on the specific information (random number) acquired in advance is not limited to the transition to the AT mode, but may be the transition to the advantageous section or specialized. It may be a transition to a zone, it may be an addition of the number of games, it may be an addition of a predetermined number of games (the number of additional games is large or small), or it may be the occurrence of a predetermined effect. Good.

(31) The AT counter is configured to be acquired as a random number for the lottery used in the AT mode transition lottery at the time of the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44, but it is configured to be acquired at another timing. May be good. For example, it may be during the first stop OFF operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the first to third stop ON operations. Further, it may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the start lever 41, or may be acquired based on the operation of the credit input switches 56 to 58. These operations may be valid operations in which the game progresses based on the operations, or may be acquired based on invalid operations such as during a period in which the operations are invalid. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of immediate acquisition based on the operation, and may be, for example, the configuration of acquiring after a predetermined period based on the operation, or when the middle stop switch 43 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated. Is acquired, but it may be acquired by a combination of a plurality of operations, such as not acquiring when the right stop switch 44 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated.

(32) When the AT counter is acquired in the random number acquisition process, the AT counter is acquired independently of the lottery result of the game without being affected by the lottery result of the game at the time of acquisition. However, the AT counter acquired based on the lottery result of the game may be different. For example, when the lottery result of the game is the first result such as strong cherry, the AT counter having a value of 1 from "1" to "64" is acquired as the first numerical range, and the lottery result of the game is obtained. In the case of a second result such as a strong watermelon, an AT counter with a value of 1 out of "65" to "128" is acquired as the second numerical range, depending on the lottery result in the game. The configuration may be such that the numerical value to be acquired is specified.

Further, the type of AT counter to be acquired may be different depending on the lottery mode. For example, in the first mode, the AT counter having a value of 1 out of "1" to "128" is acquired as the first numerical range, while in the second mode, the second numerical range is "1" to "64". The AT counter having a value of 1 may be acquired. In this case, the superiority of the second mode over the first mode may be set according to the numerical range of the acquired AT counter.

(33) The game by the 3-bet game performed in the state where the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game is carried over is described as a normal game, but it depends on the 2-bet game performed in the state where the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game is carried over. The game may be a normal game, or a second bet game or a third bet game played without carrying over the first BB or the second BB may be a normal game. Further, a game by a 2-bet game performed in a state where the second BB is carried over may be a normal game, or a game by a 3-bet game performed in a state where the first BB is carried over may be a normal game.

(34) The first mode and the second mode are provided as the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery, but the lottery modes may be of a plurality of types and may have three or more types.

(35) The ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball ejection rate and setting 6 has the highest ball ejection rate. However, depending on the set value, the ball ejection rate (game medium) Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the ball output rates of some set values may be the same, such as the ball output rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2 being the same, but the ball output rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases by a predetermined amount in a short time and decreases by a predetermined amount in a long time, and in settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The reduction of a predetermined amount may take less time than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may have a configuration in which the increase or decrease of the number of balls is hardly generated. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(36) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels and corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to 1 line in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be 5 lines.

(37) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type game machine) having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

(38) In the above embodiment, a gaming machine of a type in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is exemplified by inserting a medal as a game medium and setting the number of bets to start the game. However, this does not deny a medalless type game machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type game machine, for example, a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) can be used to set the number of bets on the game so that the game can be started, and the above-mentioned benefits corresponding to the winning of the game are described above. It is preferable that a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to a predetermined number of medals is given. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the game machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, it is preferable to have a configuration for notifying information indicating the number of prize balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A game start means (a function of executing the processes of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) to start the game based on the start operation by the player, and
A game ending means (a function of executing the processes of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) to end the game based on the ending operation by the player, and
A game number grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping the advantageous section game number AG by the main control device 101) for grasping the number of games from a predetermined start opportunity (advantageous section transition game), and
Assuming that a predetermined determination trigger (specific trigger) has occurred that the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means becomes a specific number, grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player can be executed. Judgment means (function to execute AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) and
The privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (to the AT mode by the main control device 101) based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting response result corresponding to the granting the privilege to the player. A function that executes the process that causes the migration) and
With
A high grant state (second mode) in which the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant correspondence result, and a low grant state (first mode) in which the grant correspondence result is less likely to be obtained than the high grant state. Has been set and
When a predetermined first transition opportunity is established, the first transition means for shifting from the low grant state to the high grant state (a function of executing the process of clearing the first mode flag by the main control device 101) and
When a predetermined second transition opportunity is established, a second transition means (a function of executing a process of setting the first mode flag by the main control device 101) for shifting from the high grant state to the low grant state, and
With
As the game started by the game starting means, the first game (for example, a 3-bet game) in which the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger can be established, and the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger. A second game (for example, a 2-bet game) whose establishment is restricted is set.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means includes the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game.

According to the above configuration, in a game machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and the game is ended based on an end operation, the number of games from a predetermined start opportunity is a specific number. Assuming that a predetermined judgment opportunity has occurred, a grant judgment is made as to whether or not to grant the privilege to the player, and the result of the grant judgment is a high grant state and a grant correspondence result that are likely to be a grant correspondence result. Since a difficult low grant state is set, the grant rate of the privilege differs depending on which grant state the grant determination is made, and the game can be diversified. In such a configuration, the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state occurs in the first game, but does not occur in the second game. Therefore, it is a privilege to shift to the high grant state in the first game. It will be a shortcut for. In addition, the number of games for generating the determination trigger that triggers the above-mentioned grant determination includes both the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game. Therefore, for example, when the transition to the high grant state occurs in the first game, it is possible to realize a game in which the second game waits until the determination trigger of the grant determination occurs while maintaining the high grant state. it can. By doing so, while utilizing the configuration in which the first game and the second game exist as the game started by the start operation by the player, the player is in a situation such as the grant state and whether or not the determination opportunity is established. It is possible to realize an interesting game property such as selecting which game to play according to the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The above "high grant state" may be expressed as "first state", and "low grant state" may be expressed as "second state". In this case, the "second mode" shown in the first embodiment corresponds to the "first state", and the "first mode" corresponds to the "second state". Further, the "first transition opportunity" may be expressed as the "first transition condition", and the "second transition opportunity" may be expressed as the "second transition condition". These changes in expression can be applied to other features and feature groups.

Feature A2. In the first game, the execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger is permitted, while in the second game, the execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger is restricted. The gaming machine according to the feature A1.

According to the above configuration, for example, after a determination trigger is generated in the second game, it is necessary to switch to the first game in order to receive the grant determination. By doing so, in a series of games such as shifting to the high grant state in the first game and then switching to the second game, and causing a judgment opportunity in the second game and then switching to the first game. Not only the gameplay that determines the switching timing to the second game, but also the gameplay that determines the switching timing to the first game is added, and the interest of the game is further improved.

Feature A3. The feature A1 or the feature A1 characterized in that the grant determination means is configured to execute the grant determination in the first first game after it is grasped by the game number grasping means that the specific number has been reached. The gaming machine according to feature A2.

According to the above configuration, even if the game that has reached a specific number is the second game, by switching to the first game after that, the grant determination is performed in the switched game. In this way, it is clarified that even if the game is advanced while the high grant state is maintained by the second game, the grant determination is performed by switching to the first game after that, for example, to a specific number. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the grant determination not being performed if the game to be reached is the second game, or the grant determination not being performed easily after switching to the first game.

Feature A4. Features A1 to A3 characterized in that the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger are not established after the number of games executed from the predetermined start trigger reaches the specific number. The game machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, if the player shifts to the high grant state by the time the number of executions reaches a specific number, it will not shift to the low grant state in the subsequent games. On the contrary, if the number of executions does not shift to the high grant state by the time the number reaches a specific number, the game does not shift to the high grant state in the subsequent games, and the grant determination must be received in the low grant state. Therefore, how the situation where the specific number is reached is the key to the game, and the degree of attention to the game up to the specific number can be dramatically increased.

Moreover, for example, if the above configuration is applied to the feature A2, the game is switched to the second game after shifting to the high grant state in the first game, and after reaching a specific number, the game is switched to the first game again in order to receive the grant determination. In this case, the transition from the high grant state to the low grant state is avoided. In this way, it shifts to the high grant state in the first game, reaches a specific number while maintaining the high grant state in the second game, and receives the grant judgment in the first game. The game can be realized more preferably.

Feature A5. Based on the establishment of a predetermined notification opportunity (winning the special notification lottery), the special notification corresponding to the high grant state or the low grant state can be executed by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, which comprises a special notification means (a function of executing a special notification process by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether the current state for determining the grant is the high grant state or the low grant state by the special notification. As a result, it is possible to preferably perform a game such as shifting to a high grant state in the first game and then switching to the second game to reach a specific number.

The "notification trigger" may be expressed as a "notification condition".

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the notification trigger is established on the condition that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant correspondence result.

According to the above configuration, the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means does not become the grant response result, and the special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the privilege was not granted. As a result, it becomes easier to perform a game for determining the transition to the high grant state, and the grant determination is easily executed in the high grant state. Therefore, it is possible to follow the decrease in the player's motivation to play when the result of the grant is not obtained.

Feature A7. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the privilege granting means is allowed to grant the privilege and a normal state (normal section) in which the privilege granting by the privilege granting means is restricted are set. Ori,
When the specific state ends and shifts to the normal state, the initialization means for executing the initialization processing of various information used in the specific state (execution of the initialization processing of the advantageous section information by the main control unit 101). Function to do)
This game machine is
It includes at least a first control device (main control device 101) having the grant determination means and the initialization means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the special notification means.
The second control device is a storage means (trigger) that can store specific information (the number of consecutive times in which the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won) used for success or failure of the notification trigger across the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6, which comprises a through counter).

According to the above configuration, when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, a specific state in which the privilege can be granted and a normal state in which the privilege grant is restricted are set, and the transition from the specific state to the normal state is performed. Is performed to initialize various information used in the specific state, so that the information in the specific state is not carried over to the normal state and the game is started from the normal state. Fairness among players at the start is guaranteed. On the other hand, in order to ensure fairness in this way, there is a high possibility that the game will be terminated as a result of the termination of the specific state, and there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease. Therefore, while assuming that the initialization process is performed at the end of the specific state as described above, the specification used for the success or failure of the notification trigger that the special notification corresponding to the high grant state or the low grant state is executed. Since the information can be stored across specific states, it is possible to associate the information between the specific states by the special notification. As a result, it becomes possible to motivate the player to continue the game across a specific state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Feature A8. The notification trigger is established on the condition that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant correspondence result.
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the specific information is information corresponding to the number of times of the grant determination that did not result in the grant correspondence result.

According to the above configuration, the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means does not become the grant response result, and the special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the privilege was not granted. As a result, it becomes easier to perform a game for determining the transition to the high grant state, and the grant determination is easily executed in the high grant state. Therefore, it is possible to follow the decrease in the player's motivation to play when the result of the grant is not obtained.

In addition, since the number of grant judgments that did not result in the granting response is stored across specific states, the so-called ceiling function up to the granting of benefits can be performed across multiple specific states using the specific information. It will be possible to realize.

Feature A9. In the special notification means, as the special notification corresponding to the high grant state or the low grant state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game by the second game than to play the game by the first game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A8, which is capable of executing notification of the fact that the above is true.

According to the above configuration, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game in the second game than to play the first game, instead of directly notifying the high grant state or the low grant state, and the second game. It is possible to give a strong impression that the player has succeeded in maintaining a high grant state by the player's own operation and has won the grant response result because it is informed that it is a situation to be performed. Become. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature A10. A setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium is set in a plurality of stages, and a setting means (main control device 101) for setting a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by
The notification trigger is established when the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A9, characterized in that the easiness is different.

According to the above configuration, a setting difference is provided in the execution rate of the special notification. By doing so, it is possible to change the increase / decrease rate and increase / decrease mode of the game medium by using the special notification corresponding to the high grant state and the low grant state, and it is possible to contribute to the diversification of the game.

Feature A11. The special notification means sends the special notification at a timing after the transition timing in which the first transition means shifts to the high grant state or the second shift means shifts to the low grant state in one game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A10, which is characterized by being feasible.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is executed after shifting from the low grant state to the high grant state or from the high grant state to the low grant state in one game. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the next game is the first game or the second game based on the special notification. That is, if the order of the above transition and the notification is reversed and the transition of the granted state can occur after the special notification, the game is switched to the first game or the second game based on the special notification. Nevertheless, there may be an inconvenience that the game next to the special notification is in a state different from the granting state indicated by the special notification. On the other hand, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to preferably perform the game using the special notification without causing such an inconvenience.

Feature A12. Based on the game result of the first game, the first transition opportunity is established,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the second transition opportunity is established based on the game result of the first game.

According to the above configuration, the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state occurs based on the game result of the first game. Therefore, while predicting the transition of the grant state from the game result of the first game, the game proceeds to the second game. It is possible to realize a game to be switched. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game result of the first game is dramatically increased.

Feature A13. When the game result of the first game is a predetermined first game result (specific combination), the first transition opportunity can be established, while the second transition opportunity is established more than the first transition opportunity. If the configuration is difficult and the game result of the first game is a second game result (for example, normal lip A to normal lip C) different from the first game result, the second transition opportunity can be established. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the first transition trigger has a configuration that is less likely to be established than the second transition trigger.

According to the above configuration, if the game result of the first game is the first game result, the first transition opportunity occurs and it is easy to shift to the high grant state, and if it is the second game result, the second transition trigger occurs. Since the configuration is such that it is easy to shift to the low grant state, the player plays while expecting that the game result will be the first game result, and will play while expecting that the game result will not be the second game result. In this case, there is a possibility that a second transition trigger may occur when the result is the first game, and a first transition trigger may occur when the result is the second game. Although it is possible to predict whether or not it is staying in the granted state to some extent, it is not determined. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the fun of predicting the grant state and improve the interest of the first game.

Feature A14. The grant determination means is a game before it is grasped that the number of games has reached the specific number by the game number grasping means, and the game result of the game is a predetermined specific result (specific combination). In some cases, the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that the grant determination can be executed.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of games has not reached a specific number, the grant determination can be executed if the game result of the game is a specific result. By doing so, the games up to a specific number will not be slackened, and the interest of the games will be improved.

Feature A15. The grant determination means can execute the grant determination if the game for which the game result is the specific result is the first game, while the execution of the grant determination is restricted if the game is the second game. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that the configuration or the configuration does not produce the specific result in the second game.

According to the above configuration, if a specific result is obtained in the first game, the grant determination is made, but even if the specific result is obtained in the second game, the grant judgment is not made, or in the first place, the specific result is determined. Since it is configured so as not to become, it can be motivated to play in the first game. In this way, it is possible to perform a game that waits not only for a high grant state in the first game but also for a specific result, and the interest of the game is further improved.

Feature A16. When the number of games from the predetermined start trigger becomes the first shift number, the first shift trigger occurs, and when the number of games from the predetermined start trigger becomes the second shift number, the second shift trigger occurs. Various types of transition number information storage means (various table storage areas of ROM 105 of the main control device 101) capable of storing a plurality of types of transition number information (mode transition table) between the first transition number and the second transition number determined to occur. 105a) and
Based on the predetermined start trigger, the selection means (execution of the advantageous section transition game process by the main control device 101) for selecting one transition number information from the transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means. Function) and
A transition trigger determination means (by the main control device 101) capable of determining whether or not the game corresponds to the establishment of the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger based on the shift number information selected by the selection means. A function that executes the process of determining the mode based on the mode transition table) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the occurrence of the transition trigger of both grant states is determined by the transition number information and the number of games executed, so that the transition of the grant states can be grasped in advance on the game machine side. By doing so, the configuration for determining the occurrence of the transition trigger in each game is overwhelmingly simple as compared with the configuration in which the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of each game as in feature A12. For example, it is possible to notify in advance how soon the transition will occur. Therefore, in order to realize the playability using both grant states, the configuration can be simplified or the interest can be improved.

Feature A17. Whether or not the shift trigger determination means is a game corresponding to the establishment of the first shift trigger and the second shift trigger based on the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means and the shift number information. The gaming machine according to feature A16, which is characterized in that it can be determined.

According to the above configuration, since the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means is the total number of the number of games in the first game and the number of games in the second game, both are given by using the transition number information. In the configuration for shifting the state, even if the second game is performed, it is possible to determine whether or not the current number of games is a game corresponding to the occurrence of the first transition trigger or the second transition trigger. is there. That is, it can be determined that the number of games is the number of games even if the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger do not actually occur in the second game and the grant state does not shift. In this way, it is also possible to notify whether the player may switch to the first game while the player is avoiding the transition of the granted state in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably improve the interest of the game of switching between the first game and the second game.

Feature A18. In the second game, the game base is the average value of the deduction between the game value (number of bets) used in the game and the game value (number of payouts) given as a result of the game, rather than the first game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that it is set to be high.

According to the above configuration, in the game property of switching to the second game until the number of games reaches a specific number after shifting to the high grant state in the first game, the loss of the game value in the second game is lost. Can be reduced. Even with such a configuration, since the transition to the high grant state is restricted in the second game, the significance of performing the game in the first game is guaranteed.

Feature A19. It is provided with a bet number setting means (a function of executing the processes of step S205 and step S206 by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game based on the operation by the player.
The game in which the first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means is the first game.
The description according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein a game in which a second bet number (2 bets) different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means is the second game. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can switch between the first game and the second game simply by switching the number of bets on the game. By doing so, for example, when switching to the second game when the transition to the high grant state occurs, it is possible to easily switch the game regardless of the skill level of the game of the player.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A19 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technology that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "Here, the above example and the like, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Feature B1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. As a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) and
It is a game machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode to win a prize, and the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result is awarded a profit that can be given a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the mode notification executing means (mainly) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function to execute push order notification processing by the control device 101) is provided.
An advantageous state (advantageous section) capable of shifting to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification executing means, and a normal state in which the mode notification cannot be executed by the mode notification executing means. (Normal section) and is set,
A game number grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state, and
When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches a specific number, a transition determination means (AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the specific state is performed. Function to execute) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is special based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that shifts to the gaming state and terminates the special gaming state based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and
With
The number of games grasped by the game number grasping means includes the number of games in the special game state.
In the special gaming state, the number of bets by the main control device 101 is specified according to the gaming state, which can limit the execution of the specific processing (process related to the instruction function) related to the mode notification, including the transition determination by the transition determining means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a function (a function of executing a process for limiting a process related to an instruction function) when the number is not the specified number.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by a predetermined notification means. By performing the operation, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. In this case, since the specific state in which the mode notification is possible is set so as to be able to shift to the advantageous state and the mode notification itself is not performed in the normal state, the superiority of the advantageous state over the normal state is guaranteed. Will be done. Moreover, since the game machine is configured to determine the transition to the specific state when the number of games in the advantageous state reaches a specific number, the interest in the number of games in the advantageous state is increased, and the number of games is increased. Aiming to reach a specific number is realized.

In addition, in this game machine, the lottery result becomes the transition result, and the special gaming state as a so-called bonus state that shifts when the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position is set, and the number of games in the special gaming state is also set. Since it is included in the number of games that reach the above-mentioned specific number, it may be advantageous for the player to play the advantageous state in the special game state as much as possible. On the other hand, in the special gaming state, the execution of the specific process related to the mode notification including the transition determination is restricted. Therefore, for example, depending on the end timing of the special gaming state, the transition determination may not be performed easily. There may be situations where the transition decision is made in a disadvantageous situation.

By doing so, in order to increase the number of games for making a transition judgment that causes a transition to a specific state during an advantageous state, it is better for the player to cause a transition to a special gaming state. If the transition timing and end timing to the special gaming state are not determined while making it possible to gain, the execution of the specific process related to the mode notification is restricted, so that the special gaming state can be entered during the advantageous state. The gameplay that allows the player to judge whether or not to cause a transition is realized, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature B2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the pattern combination for the transition does not stop at the effective position, the reservation means (main control device) capable of reserving the transition result information indicating the transition result. It has a function to execute the process of setting the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by 101).
The feature B1 is characterized in that the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means includes the number of games in the reserved state (internal state) in which the transition result information is reserved in the reserved means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the number of games in the reserved state, which is the situation in which the transition result is won, also contributes to the specific number. By doing so, the game can be advanced while waiting for the transition to the special gaming state until the desired transition timing is reached in the reserved state.

Feature B3. It is provided with a bet number setting means (a function of executing the processes of step S205 and step S206 by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game based on the operation by the player.
The limiting means allows the execution of the specific process in a game in which the first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means and is started, while the bet number setting means sets the first bet number. Is a configuration in which the execution of the specific process can be restricted in a game started with a different second bet number (2 bets) set.
In the game in which the second bet number is set and started by the bet number setting means, the pattern combination for the transition can be stopped at the effective position, while the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means. The game machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the transition pattern combination does not stop or is set so as not to stop at the effective position in the game started.

According to the above configuration, it is necessary to switch the bet number of the game to the second bet number instead of the first bet number in order to cause the transition to the special gaming state. In this case, the first bet number allows the execution of the specific process, while the second bet number limits the execution of the specific process. Therefore, in the game that attempts to cause a transition to the special game state, the specific process is performed. Execution is restricted. In other words, if the game is played with the first bet number in order to execute the specific process, the transition to the special game state does not occur, so the specific process is executed by unintentionally shifting to the special game state. It is possible to avoid the event that is restricted.

Feature B4. It is provided with a bet number setting means (a function of executing the processes of step S205 and step S206 by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game based on the operation by the player.
The limiting means allows the execution of the specific process in a game in which the first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means and is started, while the bet number setting means sets the first bet number. Is a configuration in which the execution of the specific process can be restricted in a game started with a different second bet number (2 bets) set.
In the game in which the second bet number is set and started by the bet number setting means, the lottery result by the lottery means can be the transition result, while the first bet number is set and started by the bet number setting means. Any of the features B1 to B3, wherein the lottery result by the lottery means is set so as not to be the transition result or to be less likely to be the transition result than when the first bet number is set. The game machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, in order to win the transition result that causes the transition to the special gaming state, it is necessary to switch the bet number of the game to the second bet number instead of the first bet number. In this case, the first bet number allows the execution of the specific process, while the second bet number limits the execution of the specific process. Therefore, in the game that attempts to cause a transition to the special game state, the specific process is performed. Execution is restricted. In other words, if the game is played with the first bet number in order to execute the specific process, it is difficult to win the transition result that may cause the transition to the special gaming state, so the transition to the special gaming state is unintentionally made. It is possible to prevent an event in which the execution of a specific process is restricted.

Feature B5. The description according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the number of games executed from the transition to the special gaming state to the end of the special gaming state may be less than the specific number. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the transition to the special gaming state is caused, the number of games does not reach a specific number by itself, for example, when the transition to the special gaming state is made shortly after the transition to the advantageous state. Will also be able to occur in situations where a certain number has not been reached at the end of the special gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably execute the game in which the timing for causing the transition to the special game state in which the execution of the specific process is restricted is determined.

Feature B6. The description according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the number of games executed from the transition to the special gaming state to the end of the special gaming state can be larger than the specific number. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the special gaming state is caused, the number of games reaches a specific number by itself. Therefore, for example, when the state is changed to the special game state shortly after the state is changed to the advantageous state, the specific number is always reached when the special game state ends. By doing so, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of the player, such as when there is a situation in which even the execution of a specific process before the transition to the special gaming state is desired to be restricted.

Feature B7. As the special game state, the first special game state that shifts when the game result of the game becomes the first game result (first BB prize) and the game result of the game become the second game result (second BB prize). The second special game state to be transferred with is set,
While the number of games executed from the transition to the first special gaming state to the end of the first special gaming state can be larger than the specific number, while
Any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the number of games executed from the transition to the second special gaming state to the end of the second special gaming state may be less than the specific number. The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, depending on the type of special gaming state to be transferred, there are cases where it is determined that a specific number is reached during the special gaming state and cases where it is not determined that the specific number is reached during the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to utilize the relationship between the limitation on the execution of the specific process and the specific number, including the type of the special game state to be transferred, to improve the interest.

Feature B8. When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches the specific number in the second special game state, the player reaches the specific number in the second special game state. (The case where the AT is not won at the specific opportunity that occurred during the first BB is better than the case where the AT is not won at the specific opportunity that occurred during the second BB. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is set to have a high degree of contribution to execution).

According to the above configuration, the second special gaming state in which the number of games can be smaller than the specific number is more advantageous than the first special gaming state in which the number of games can be larger than the specific number. In an advantageous state, it is more advantageous to play a game in at least a normal game state to reach a specific number. By doing so, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which a specific number is reached while combining the normal game state and the special game state.

Feature B9. The game base, which is the average value of the deduction between the game value (number of bets) used for the game and the game value (number of payouts) given as a result of the game, is higher in the special game state than in the normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that it is set to be.

According to the above configuration, in the special game state, the execution of the specific process is not restricted, but the game base is set to be high, so that the specific number can be reached without requiring a lot of game value. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the transition to a specific state is determined by using the special game state.

Feature B10. According to the result of the specific processing executed before the number of games in the advantageous state reaches the specific number, the transition determination by the transition determination means based on reaching the specific number leads to the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that the probabilities of resulting results corresponding to the transition are different.

According to the above configuration, the result of the specific processing executed before reaching the specific number affects the result of the migration determination executed when the specific number is reached. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize the playability of successfully reaching a specific number by utilizing the special game state while executing the specific process.

Feature B11. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the pattern combination for the transition does not stop at the effective position, the reservation means (main control device) capable of reserving the transition result information indicating the transition result. It has a function to execute the process of setting the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by 101).
The limiting means is a means (non-internal state by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the execution of the specific process after the special gaming state ends until the transition result information is reserved in the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of setting the MAX bet counter to 2.

According to the above configuration, even after the special game state ends, the execution of the specific process is restricted until the transfer result information is reserved by the reservation means, so that the execution of the specific process is restricted based on the specific number included in the specific process. Execution of the transition determination will also be restricted until the reservation state is reached. By doing so, the situation of being in the reserved state can be maintained as much as possible, and the event of waiting for the transition result winning after the timing of wanting to shift to the special gaming state is prevented from occurring, and the special gaming state is used. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize the playability that makes it easy to receive the transition determination.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technology that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "Here, the above example and the like, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features B1 to B11, features A1 to A19, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A game start means (a function of executing the processes of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) to start the game based on the start operation by the player, and
A game ending means (a function of executing the processes of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) to end the game based on the ending operation by the player, and
When a predetermined determination trigger (specific trigger) occurs, a grant determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that enables execution of a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player. ,
The privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (to the AT mode by the main control device 101) based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting response result corresponding to the granting the privilege to the player. A function that executes the process that causes the migration) and
With
A high grant state (second mode) in which the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant correspondence result, and a low grant state (first mode) in which the grant correspondence result is less likely to be obtained than the high grant state. Has been set and
A game number grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping the advantageous section game number AG by the main control device 101) for grasping the number of games from a predetermined start opportunity (advantageous section transition game), and
When a predetermined first transition opportunity is established, the first transition means for shifting from the low grant state to the high grant state (a function of executing the process of clearing the first mode flag by the main control device 101) and
When a predetermined second transition opportunity is established, a second transition means (a function of executing a process of setting the first mode flag by the main control device 101) for shifting from the high grant state to the low grant state, and
When the number of games from the predetermined start trigger becomes the first shift number, the first shift trigger occurs, and when the number of games from the predetermined start trigger becomes the second shift number, the second shift trigger occurs. Various types of transition number information storage means (various table storage areas of ROM 105 of the main control device 101) capable of storing a plurality of types of transition number information (mode transition table) between the first transition number and the second transition number determined to occur. 105a) and
Based on the predetermined start trigger, the selection means (execution of the advantageous section transition game process by the main control device 101) for selecting one transition number information from the transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means. Function) and
Based on the transition number information selected by the selection means and the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means, it is possible to determine whether or not the game corresponds to the high grant state and the low grant state. State determination means (function to execute the process of performing mode determination based on the mode transition table by the main control device 101)
With
As the game started by the game starting means, the first game (for example, a 3-bet game) in which the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger can be established, and the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger. A second game (for example, a 2-bet game) whose establishment is restricted is set.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means includes the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game.

According to the above configuration, in a game machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and the game is ended based on an end operation, a game is played when a predetermined determination trigger occurs. A grant judgment is made as to whether or not to grant the privilege to the person, and the high grant state in which the result of the grant judgment is likely to be the grant response result and the low grant state in which the grant response result is unlikely to be obtained are set. Depending on whether the grant determination is made depending on the state, the grant rate of the privilege differs, and the game can be diversified. In such a configuration, the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state occurs in the first game, but does not occur in the second game. Therefore, it is a privilege to shift to the high grant state in the first game. It will be a shortcut for.

In addition, since the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state is determined by the transition number information and the number of games between the first game and the second game, the game machine side grasps the transition of the grant state in advance. It is possible, and even if it is the second game in which the transition of the grant state does not occur, it is possible for the game machine to grasp which grant state the game corresponds to. .. In this way, the information grasped by the game machine is notified to the player, and the content of the grant determination and the content of other processing are changed based on the grasped information. It is possible to dramatically improve the playability in which the first game in which the transition of the granted state can occur and the second game in which the transition cannot occur can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The special notification means (a function of executing the special notification process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the special notification corresponding to the determination result of the state determination means by the predetermined notification means is provided. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably switch between the first game and the second game based on the special notification.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification even in a situation where the second game is being performed.

According to the above configuration, even in the situation where the second game in which the transition of the granting state does not occur is performed, the player can determine which granting state is in the case of the first game by the special notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the timing of switching to the first game is determined by a special notification.

Feature C4. The special notification means has a feature C2 or a feature C3 that facilitates execution of the special notification because the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the result of the grant correspondence. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the grant judgment is not won, the special notification can be easily performed, so that the next grant judgment can be easily received in the high grant state, and the grant judgment is won. It becomes possible to make it easier, and it becomes possible to follow the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the above-mentioned grant determination is not won. In this case, even if the grant judgment is not won, it is possible to make it easier to win the grant judgment only by special notification without changing the winning probability of the grant judgment or the configuration regarding the transition trigger of the grant state. Since it is possible, it is possible to compensate for non-winning without changing complicated processing, and even if there is a situation where the above winning probability and transition opportunity cannot be changed, the compensation is possible. Can be done.

Feature C5. Features C1 to C4 characterized in that a plurality of the first transition numbers or a plurality of the second transition numbers are set in the predetermined transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of.

In the above configuration, a plurality of first transition numbers are set in the predetermined transition number information, and there are a plurality of games in which the first transition trigger from the low grant state to the high grant state occurs a plurality of times, and the high grant state to the high grant state. It shifts to the state, then shifts to the low grant state, and then it can shift to the higher grant state, and a plurality of second shift number information is set in the predetermined shift number information, and the high grant state is changed to low. It is stipulated that the number of games in which the second transition to the grant state occurs is multiple times, the high grant state is shifted to the low grant state, then the high grant state is shifted, and then the low grant state can be further shifted. It is a thing. By doing so, it is clarified that the low grant state and the high grant state are repeatedly exchanged, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game of switching between the two games while predicting the transition of both grant states.

Feature C6. When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means is a predetermined number, the transition number information determined by the state determination means to correspond to the high grant state and the state determination means correspond to the low grant state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein each transition number information is stored in the transition number information storage means so that the determined transition number information exists.

According to the above configuration, since the transfer number information is set so that the grant state is not determined by the number of games from the predetermined start trigger, which of the set transfer number information and the number of games is the grant state. It is possible not to reduce the fun of predicting.

Feature C7. It is provided with specific notification means (a function of executing table notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the transition number information selected by the selection means by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification makes it possible for the player to grasp which transition number information is selected, and based on the grasped transition number information, the timing for switching between the first game and the second game is set in advance. It is also possible to grasp the information. By doing so, it becomes easy to perform a game in which the first game and the second game are switched in relation to the granted state.

Feature C8. The game according to feature C7, wherein the specific notification means has a configuration that facilitates execution of the specific notification because the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the result of the grant correspondence. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the grant judgment is not won, the specific notification can be easily performed, so that the next grant judgment can be easily received in the high grant state, and the grant judgment is won. It becomes possible to make it easier, and it becomes possible to follow the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the above-mentioned grant determination is not won. In this case, even if the grant judgment is not won, it is possible to easily win the grant judgment only by the specific notification without changing the winning probability of the grant judgment or the configuration regarding the transition trigger of the grant state. Since it is possible, it is possible to compensate for non-winning without changing complicated processing, and even if there is a situation where the above winning probability and transition opportunity cannot be changed, the compensation is possible. Can be done.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the second game has a configuration that is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

According to the above configuration, the merit of switching to the second game can be generated. That is, although the transition of the grant state does not occur in the second game, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the situation where it is predicted that the grant state is low, it is digested in the advantageous second game and the grant state becomes high. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property such as switching to the first game.

Feature C10. In the second game, the game base is the average value of the deduction between the game value (number of bets) used in the game and the game value (number of payouts) given as a result of the game, rather than the first game. The gaming machine according to feature C9, which is characterized in that it is set to be high.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature C9. That is, it is a configuration in which the difference in advantage between the first game and the second game is embodied by the game base. Further, if the configuration is such that the difference in advantage between the two games is provided by the game base, the excellent effect of the feature C9 can be expected with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature C11. In the first game, the execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means is permitted, while in the second game, the execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted. Features C1 to C10 The game machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, when the game is switched to the second game, the grant state does not shift and the grant determination is not performed. With such a configuration, the second game has a strong impression as a discard game for receiving an advantageous grant determination in the first game, and there is a concern that the playability in the second game may be deteriorated. In that respect, as in the above feature C1, since the state determination means enables the advance grasp of the transition of the grant state and the grasp of the grant state in the second game as well, the playability in the second game is more preferable. It becomes possible to increase to.

The invention described in the above features C1 to C11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and benefits are given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the slot machine starts in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technology that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "Here, the above example and the like, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features C1 to C11, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A game start means (a function of executing the processes of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) to start the game based on the start operation by the player, and
A game ending means (a function of executing the processes of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) to end the game based on the ending operation by the player, and
When a predetermined determination trigger (specific trigger) occurs, a grant determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that enables execution of a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player. ,
The privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (to the AT mode by the main control device 101) based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting response result corresponding to the granting the privilege to the player. A function that executes the process that causes the migration) and
Grant setting means (for special notification by the display control device 81) capable of setting the ease of granting the privilege by using the specific information that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means did not result in the grant correspondence result. Function to execute processing) and
With
The grant setting means uses the specific information when the game that caused the determination trigger is the first game, and the second game that causes the determination trigger is different from the first game. A gaming machine characterized in that the ease with which the privilege is given can be made different from the case where the specific information is used in the case of a game.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and the game is ended based on an end operation, a player when a predetermined determination trigger occurs. If a grant determination is made as to whether or not to grant the privilege, and the result of the grant determination is a deviation result that does not correspond to the privilege grant, the grant setting means uses the specific information corresponding to the deviation result. Since the ease with which the privilege is granted is set, the so-called ceiling function can be realized by using the result of the grant determination.

On that basis, it is easy to grant the privilege when the game that caused the judgment trigger is the first game and the second game, and the grant judgment at the judgment trigger is a wrong result. In the setting of, the ease of granting the privilege is set to be different. By doing so, not only the result of the grant judgment but also the game that causes the judgment trigger is used to realize the ceiling function, and it is possible to diversify the game until it reaches the ceiling. Will be.

Feature D2. The probability that the grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger generated in the first game will result in the grant correspondence result, and the grant by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger generated in the second game. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which has a common probability of being a result of the grant correspondence in the determination.

According to the above configuration, if the grant determination is not won in the first game and the second game, the grant determination means is set so that the easiness of granting the privilege is different, but the grant determination is made. The winning probabilities themselves have a common structure. In other words, which game triggers the determination depends only on the so-called contribution to the ceiling. As a result, it is possible to realize the ceiling function without using a complicated configuration such as different winning probabilities by the grant determination means.

Regarding "... probability and ... probability are common", "... probability and ... probability are the same probability" and "... probability and ...・ ・ Probability is almost the same probability ”. In this case, the "substantially the same probability" may be a probability difference that the player cannot grasp the difference, even if the probability is not exactly the same.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the first game and the second game can be selected by a player's selection operation.

According to the above configuration, the player selects the game itself that causes the judgment opportunity while assuming that the transition judgment is not won, and the attention of the game is improved through active participation in the game. ..
Feature D4. While at least one of the first game and the second game is restricted from executing the grant determination by the grant determination means, the determination trigger occurs in either of the first game and the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it is obtained.
According to the above configuration, although the execution of the grant determination is restricted in at least one of the first game and the second game, a determination opportunity may occur in both the first game and the second game. That is, after the determination trigger is generated in the first game or the second game, the determination of any of the first game and the second game is not the first game or the second game, but is subsequently granted. In terms of gameplay, the degree of contribution to the ceiling that the result of the grant judgment based on the judgment trigger was different depends on which game caused the judgment trigger. It becomes possible to realize the sex.
Feature D5. The first game and the second game are characterized in that the execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted, while the determination trigger can occur in either the first game or the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D4.
According to the above configuration, although the execution of the grant determination is restricted in the first game and the second game, a determination opportunity may occur. That is, in terms of game characteristics, such that after the determination trigger is generated in the first game or the second game, the grant determination is performed after that, not in the first game or the second game, the judgment trigger is performed in any game. It is possible to realize a novel game playability such that the degree of contribution to the ceiling that the result of the grant judgment based on the judgment trigger is different depends on whether or not the above is caused.
Feature D6. Based on the establishment of the predetermined first transition condition, the player shifts to the first special gaming state in which the first game is performed, and the first is based on the establishment of the predetermined first end condition. The first transition means for ending the special game state (a function of executing the process for starting / ending the first BB state in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined second transition condition, the second special game state is performed, and the second special game state has a different advantage for the player from the first special game state. A second transition means (for starting / ending the second BB state in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting and ending the second special gaming state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined second end condition. Function to execute processing) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that
According to the above configuration, regarding the judgment triggers that occur during the so-called bonuses such as the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, which have different advantages for the player, the judgment triggers depend on which bonus the judgment triggers occur. If the grant judgment is based on the above, the succession to the ceiling will be different. By doing so, in addition to the conventional playability such as which bonus to enjoy the profit, the weight of the bonus type such that the degree of contribution to the ceiling differs depending on which bonus causes the judgment trigger. The bonus will be made more profound, and it will be possible to contribute to improving the interest of the game.
Feature D7. It is equipped with a bet number setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the bet number by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the first game and the second game are games in which the same number of bets is set.
According to the above configuration, although the first game and the second game are games with the same number of bets, the case where the judgment trigger is generated in the first game and the case where the judgment trigger is generated in the second game. Therefore, the degree of contribution to the ceiling when the judgment result is wrong is different. With such a configuration, the importance of the degree of contribution to the ceiling becomes more important in the configuration in which the player can select which game causes the judgment trigger, and it depends on the playability of feature D1. The interest is enhanced.
Feature D8. It is equipped with a bet number setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the bet number by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the first game and the second game are games in which different betting numbers are set.
According to the above configuration, the number of bets is different between the first game and the second game, and there are cases where a judgment trigger is generated in the first game and a judgment trigger is generated in the second game. When the judgment result is out of order, the degree of contribution to the ceiling is different. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest while making good use of the association between the degree of contribution to the ceiling and the number of bets.

Feature D9. The second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game (the base of the two-bet game is higher than that of the three-bet game, and the maximum number of payouts of the first BB is higher than that of the second BB. Often),
The grant setting means uses the specific information when the game that caused the determination trigger is the first game, and the game that caused the determination trigger is the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, which can be set so that the privilege can be easily given as compared with the case where the specific information is used.

According to the above configuration, the ceiling function is set so that the privilege is more easily given when the judgment trigger is generated by the disadvantageous game. As a result, it is possible to realize different game characteristics such as whether to make the grant judgment this time in an advantageous second game or to make it the first game in anticipation of non-winning, and a variety of games. Is planned.

Feature D10. In the second game, the game base is the average value of the deduction between the game value (number of bets) used in the game and the game value (number of payouts) given as a result of the game, rather than the first game. The gaming machine according to feature D9, which is characterized in that it is set to be high.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of the feature D9. That is, it is a configuration in which the difference in advantage between the first game and the second game is embodied by the game base. Further, if the configuration is such that the difference in advantage between the two games is provided by such a game base, the excellent effect of the feature D9 can be expected with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature D11. It is provided with a special notification means (a function of executing a special notification process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification by a predetermined notification means in order to make the grant determination by the grant determination means advantageous to the player. ,
The grant setting means according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that the ease of granting the privilege is set by setting the ease of execution of the special notification by the special notification means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the grant setting means does not make the probability of the grant determination by the grant determination means different, but executes a special notification for making the grant determination advantageous, thereby making it easier to grant the privilege. It will be configured to realize the ceiling function. By doing so, even if there is a situation in which the probability of grant determination cannot be changed, the ceiling function can be installed, which can greatly contribute to the improvement of playability.

Feature D12. A high grant state in which the determination result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant correspondence result and a low grant state in which the grant determination result is less likely to be the grant correspondence result than the high grant state are set.
The gaming machine according to feature D11, wherein the special notification means can execute notification corresponding to the high grant state or the low grant state as the special notification.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of the feature D11. That is, when the state in which the grant determination is performed is configured to have a high grant state and a low grant state, it is advantageous for the player to receive the grant determination based on the determination trigger in the high grant state. Therefore, by configuring the notification corresponding to such a high grant state or a low grant state to be executed as a special notification, it is possible to generate a judgment opportunity after grasping which grant state is staying. It becomes possible to receive the grant judgment, and through this, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the grant judgment and granting the privilege.

Feature D13. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the privilege granting means is allowed to grant the privilege and a normal state (normal section) in which the privilege granting by the privilege granting means is restricted are set. Ori,
When the specific state ends and shifts to the normal state, the initialization means for executing the initialization processing of various information used in the specific state (execution of the initialization processing of the advantageous section information by the main control unit 101). Function to do)
This game machine is
It includes at least a first control device (main control device 101) having the grant determination means and the initialization means, and at least a second control device (display control device 81) having the grant setting means and the special notification means. And
The gaming machine according to feature D11 or feature D12, wherein the second control device includes a storage means (trigger through counter) capable of storing the specific information across the specific state.

According to the above configuration, when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, a specific state in which the privilege can be granted and a normal state in which the privilege grant is restricted are set, and the transition from the specific state to the normal state is performed. Is performed to initialize various information used in the specific state, so that the information in the specific state is not carried over to the normal state and the game is started from the normal state. Fairness among players at the start is guaranteed. On the other hand, in order to ensure fairness in this way, there is a high possibility that the game will be terminated as a result of the termination of the specific state, and there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease. Therefore, while assuming that the initialization process is performed at the end of the specific state as described above, the specific information that the grant determination used for setting the special notification as the ceiling function was not won is the specific state. Since it is possible to memorize across the above, it is possible to associate each specific state with the special notification. This makes it possible to motivate the game to continue across a specific state, and it is also possible to realize a ceiling that straddles a specific state.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D13 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technology that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "Here, the above example and the like, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features D1 to D13, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A bet number operation means (credit insertion switch 56) for setting a game bet number, and
A bet number setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game based on the operation of the bet number operating means, and
The game can be started by setting the bet number by the bet number setting means, and the game start means (processes S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) for starting the game based on the start operation by the player are executed. Function) and
A game ending means (a function of executing the processes of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) to end the game based on the ending operation by the player, and
When a predetermined determination trigger (specific trigger) occurs, a grant determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the privilege granting means (shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101) capable of granting the privilege to the player Function to execute processing) and
With
The first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means, and the permissible state in which the grant determination is allowed to be executed by the grant determination means and the first bet number different from the first bet number by the bet number setting means. Two bets are set, and a restricted state is set in which the execution of the grant judgment is restricted.
The bet number setting means
When the bet number operating means is operated, the first bet number setting means for setting the first bet number and the first bet number setting means.
When the bet number operation means is operated, the second bet number setting means for setting the second bet number and the second bet number setting means.
With
A state in which the bet number is set by the first bet number setting means (a state in which 3 is input to the MAX bet counter) when the bet number operation means is operated based on a predetermined switching opportunity. ) And the switching means for switching between the state in which the bet number is set by the second bet number setting means (the state in which 2 is input to the MAX bet counter) (in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101). A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of switching a MAX bet counter).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the setting of the number of bets by the player and the start operation, the game is ended based on the end operation, and a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined determination opportunity occurs. In a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine, in which a grant determination is made to determine whether or not to grant a privilege when the result of the grant determination is a grant response result corresponding to the privilege grant, the privilege is given according to the number of bets on the game. Since the permissible state in which the execution of the grant judgment is permitted and the restricted state in which the execution of the grant judgment is restricted are set, the game related to the grant judgment is limited while allowing a plurality of bets. , It is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts that attempt to illegally obtain benefits by using the difference in the number of bets.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the bet number operating means is operated, the first bet number to be in the allowable state may be set, or the second bet number to be in the restricted state may be set, which is switched. When an opportunity arises, the number of bets to be set is switched. By doing so, while assuming a game with the first bet number that is normally allowed to execute the grant determination, for example, for some reason, the situation should be advanced while restricting the execution of the grant determination. In some cases, it is possible to use the configuration related to the above-mentioned restricted state that defines the relationship between the number of bets and the grant determination, such as allowing the game to be played by the second number of bets, to improve the playability. Become. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. Separately provided from the bet number operation means, another bet number operation means (credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the bet number of the game is provided.
While the first bet number is set by the first bet number setting means, the second bet number can be set by operating the separate bet number operation means, and the second bet number can be set. The game according to feature E1, wherein the first bet number can be set by operating the separate bet number operating means in a state where the second bet number is set by the setting means. Machine.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where the bet number set when the bet number operation means is operated by the switching means is determined, the bet number on the other side can be changed by operating another bet number operation means. It becomes possible to set. That is, the player is free to decide which bet number to set to play the game, and the switching means is used to encourage the player to set the bet number according to the game content. By doing so, the number of bets can be decided by one's own will, and the number of bets can be switched and the grant judgment can be restricted within the range that does not eliminate the real thrill of the so-called slot machine, such as starting and ending the game by one's own operation. The presence or absence can be applied to playability.

Feature E3. Based on the start operation, a transition determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that enables the transition to the special gaming state, and the end operation corresponds to the transition correspondence result, the transition to the special gaming state is made. , A special transition means for ending the special gaming state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and
With
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the switching trigger does not occur in the transition to the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the switching of the number of bets does not occur in accordance with the transition to the special gaming state as the so-called bonus state. By doing so, the switching of the number of bets occurs regardless of the transition of the special gaming state, and the switching of the number of bets may switch to the restricted state in which the privilege grant is restricted. It is possible to realize a novel playability that has never existed before.

Feature E4. Based on the start operation, a transition determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that enables the transition to the special gaming state, and the end operation corresponds to the transition correspondence result, the transition to the special gaming state is made. , A special transition means for ending the special gaming state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and
With
From the state in which the second bet number is set by the second bet number setting means based on the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being the transition correspondence result, the first bet number setting means The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the switching opportunity to the state in which the first bet number is set occurs.

According to the above configuration, the restricted state is switched to the permissible state by winning the transition correspondence result that enables the transition to the special gaming state as the so-called bonus state. That is, the limit state of the second bet number is recommended before the transition correspondence result is won, and the allowable state of the first bet number is recommended by winning the transition correspondence result. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that has never existed before, such as the number of bets is automatically switched by winning the transition response result, and the execution of the grant judgment is allowed. Become.

Feature E5. In the game in which the second bet number is set, the transition to the special gaming state is possible, while in the game in which the first bet number is set, the transition to the special gaming state is restricted. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that.

According to the above configuration, when the game with the second bet number is switched to the game with the first bet number based on the transition correspondence result winning, the transition to the special game state due to the transition correspondence result winning does not occur. In other words, by switching the number of bets, the game shifts to a game in which the winning result of the transition as a so-called bonus is carried over. By carrying over the transition support result winning, if the situation is such that the transition support result winning should be established, the transition support result winning will be awarded earlier than the configuration that waits for the transition support result winning from there. There is a merit that it can be established. Here, for example, it is conceivable that the transfer correspondence result winning can be carried over by the first bet number without switching the bet number, after the transition correspondence result winning can be carried out by the first bet number. However, with such a configuration, when playing a game in which the grant judgment is received based on the first bet number, the transition correspondence result is always obtained before the situation in which the above-mentioned transition correspondence result prize should be established. It is necessary to force the player to play a game that avoids winning a prize, which may hinder the smooth progress of the game. In that respect, if the above configuration is used, after switching to the first bet number, the transition correspondence result prize will not be established, so that the transition correspondence result prize will be obtained at a desired timing while realizing smooth game progress. It is possible to enjoy the benefits.

Feature E6. Based on the start operation, a transition determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that enables the transition to the special gaming state, and the end operation corresponds to the transition correspondence result, the transition to the special gaming state is made. , A special transition means for ending the special gaming state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein in the special gaming state, execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the special gaming state as a so-called bonus state occurs, the execution of the grant determination is restricted. That is, the grant determination is made in a situation where the first bet number is not the special gaming state. By doing so, the game is played while expecting the grant judgment, which is different from the conventional game characteristics that tend to wait for the special game state, without excessively increasing the superiority of the special game state as the so-called bonus state. Sex can be realized. Further, by adopting the above configuration, for example, in a situation where it is not desired to make a grant determination, not only the first bet number is switched to the second bet number but also a transition to a special gaming state is caused. However, it is possible to limit the execution of the grant determination. Therefore, it is possible to increase the playability by utilizing the presence or absence of restrictions on the grant determination, and it is possible to use it for improving the interest of the game.

Feature E7. A means capable of setting the second bet number by the second bet number setting means when the bet number operating means is operated based on the end of the special gaming state is provided. The gaming machine according to feature E6, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, the restricted state is set even after the end of the special gaming state as the so-called bonus state. By doing so, the special gaming state and the state after the end of the special gaming state are in a state in which the collective determination of granting is restricted. Therefore, for example, it is possible to use it to improve the interest of the game in creating game playability while associating the state in which the grant determination is restricted with the number of bets and the special game state, such as performing an effect using the grouped state. It will be possible.

Feature E8. From the state in which the second bet number is set by the second bet number setting means based on the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being the transition correspondence result, the first bet number setting means The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the switching opportunity to the state in which the first bet number is set occurs.

According to the above configuration, the special gaming state and the grouping states in which the grant determination is restricted as the subsequent states are configured to end when the transition correspondence result that enables the transition to the special gaming state is won. By doing so, after the transition correspondence result is won and the game is shifted to the special game state to switch to the game in which the grant judgment is restricted, the game may be switched to the game in which the transition judgment is allowed as it is when the special game state ends. Instead, the transition response result is won again, and after the situation is set so that the transition to the special gaming state can occur, the game is switched to the game in which the grant determination is allowed, and the transition to the special gaming state occurs. It is possible to maintain the situation. As a result, if a transition to a special gaming state is to occur in order to limit the grant determination, it is possible to cause a transition to the special gaming state earlier without waiting for the transition response result winning. , It is possible to preferably realize the game property of avoiding the grant determination by causing the transition to the special gaming state.

Feature E9. It is provided with a special effect executing means (a function of executing a process for producing a bonus state effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special effect corresponding to the special game state by a predetermined effect means.
The special effect executing means is described in feature E8, which is capable of executing the special effect after the end of the special gaming state until the result of the transition determination by the transition determining means becomes the transition corresponding result. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the feature E8, the player can be made to accept that the restricted state continues even after the special gaming state by continuing the special effect without discomfort. This makes it possible to more preferably expect the effect of feature E8.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E9 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technology that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "Here, the above example and the like, etc. It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features E1 to E9, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
Specific information acquisition means (a function of executing random number acquisition processing in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106 g in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means, and
A specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery as to whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) is caused by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means. (A function to execute the AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101)
Based on the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being the specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means (main control device 101) that causes the specific event. (A function to execute the process to shift to AT mode) and
With
The lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and the corresponding information as the specific information in which the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery is associated with the special result is different. 1 specific state (1st mode) and 2nd specific state (2nd mode) are set.
The state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state is a permissible game (for example, a 3-bet game) in which the specific lottery is allowed to be executed by the specific lottery means, and the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set so that it can occur in any of a restricted game (for example, a two-bet game) whose execution is restricted.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws the game and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of this game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since the specific lottery for whether or not to cause a specific event is performed by using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result by the lottery means with the stop result of the orbiting body is performed. Playability that is completely different from slot machines is realized.

Moreover, the first specific state and the first specific state are different so that the corresponding information associated with the special result as the lottery result of the game is different so that the lottery result of the specific lottery becomes the specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event. Since 2 specific states are provided, even if a specific lottery is performed using the same special result and the same specific information, the winner will be won in the first specific state, but not in the second specific state. Such an event can occur. Then, depending on the specific information acquired in advance, even if the same special result is obtained, it is better to receive the specific lottery in the first specific state or the specific lottery in the second specific state. It is also possible to grasp on the machine side.

In addition, in the above configuration, the permissible game in which the execution of the specific lottery is permitted and the permissible game in which the specific lottery is executed are set, and the state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state is the permissible game and the restricted game. Since the configuration is such that any of the above can occur, it is possible to win the specific lottery by providing the specific information to the specific lottery after waiting until the specific information acquired in advance shifts to the specific state that becomes the corresponding information. On the contrary, it is possible to make the specific lottery non-winning by providing the specific information to the specific lottery after waiting until the specific information acquired in advance shifts to a specific state that does not become the corresponding information. .. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability by using the specific information acquired in advance and the lottery result of the game.

It should be noted that the above configuration is as follows: "The specific lottery means is acquired by the specific information acquisition means in a predetermined game, and is stored in the specific information storage means after the predetermined specific information and the predetermined game. By providing the configuration of "the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game, which is the game of the game, and the specific lottery can be executed by using", the acquired specific information and the subsequent game It can be further clarified that a specific lottery may be held in relation to the game result.

The "specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information" may be expressed as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information", and "predetermined plurality of specific information storage means". It may be expressed as "a specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information". Such changes in expression are also applicable to other features and groups of features.

Feature F2. Described in feature F1 characterized in that it is provided with switching operation means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) capable of switching between the allowable game and the restricted game based on the operation of the player. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can select and switch between the allowable game and the restricted game. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the player decides whether or not to consume the pre-acquired specific information in relation to the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F3. A bet number operation means (credit insertion switch 56) for setting a game bet number, and
A bet number setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game based on the operation of the bet number operating means, and
With
A game in which a first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means is included in the allowable game, and a second bet number different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein is included in the restricted game.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of the feature F2. In particular, as described above, by setting the number of game bets in a so-called slot machine, it is possible to switch between a permissible game and a restricted game, thereby adding a new configuration for a switching operation. However, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature F2 by making good use of the existing configuration.

Feature F4. Specific notification means (hold display processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification (hold display) of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that it has a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, since it is possible to grasp the specific information acquired in advance based on the specific notification, whether or not the specific information is in a specific state that becomes the corresponding information when the specific information is provided to the specific lottery. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether or not. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the switching between the restricted game and the permissible game, that is, whether or not the specific information is consumed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature F5. The specific notification is updated based on the acquisition of the specific information by the specific information acquisition means, and the specific information stored by the specific information storage means is used for the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature F4, which is provided with an updating means (a function of executing a hold shift process by the display control device 81) capable of updating the specific notification based on the above.

According to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not the specific notification is updated, it is possible to grasp whether or not the specific information is consumed, and it becomes possible to know whether the game is a restricted game or an allowable game. In this way, it is possible to facilitate a game of predicting a specific state in which the specific information is provided to the specific lottery while predicting and grasping the corresponding information from the content of the specific information grasped from the specific notification. Is possible.

Feature F6. Special notification means capable of executing the first specific state or the special notification corresponding to the second specific state by a predetermined notification means (first mode effect or second mode effect by the display control device 81, first The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that it includes a function for executing a mode prediction effect and a process for performing a second mode prediction effect).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp which specific state is in the state based on the special notification. By doing so, it becomes possible to facilitate prediction of a specific state when the specific information acquired in advance is provided to the specific lottery.

Feature F7. The special notification means is capable of executing notification suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification (for the first mode effect by the display control device 81 or for the second mode). The gaming machine according to feature F6, which is characterized by having (a function of executing a process for performing an effect).

According to the above configuration, the special notification suggests whether the current game is in the first specific state or the second specific state. By doing so, when a specific lottery for specific information is performed, it is possible to predict and grasp from the specific state whether or not the specific lottery will be won, and further, for example, the specific state. In a configuration where there is regularity in the transition, the content of the specific lottery for the specific information acquired in advance based on the prediction of the subsequent transition of the specific state from the current type of specific state. It is also possible to predict and grasp. By doing so, the playability using the special notification can be dramatically improved.

Feature F8. The special notification means is a second special notification means (first mode by the display control device 81) capable of executing notification suggesting a specific state of the game after a predetermined number of games after the special notification is executed as the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature F6 or feature F7, which is provided with a function for executing a process for performing a prediction effect or a second mode prediction effect).

According to the above configuration, the special notification suggests whether the game after the current game is in the first specific state or the second specific state. By doing so, it is possible to grasp in advance the specific state when the specific lottery for the specific information acquired in advance is performed, and it is also possible to predict and grasp the contents of the specific lottery. By doing so, the playability using the special notification can be dramatically improved.

Feature F9. The specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a specific number of the specific information, which is a plurality of numbers.
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the predetermined number is less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the special notification by the second special notification means as the notification suggesting the future specific state corresponds to the specific state after the number of games, which is smaller than the upper limit number of the specific information acquired and stored in advance. It will be a notification. By doing so, after grasping the specific state in relation to the specific information acquired in advance, the content of the specific lottery is predicted and grasped from the balance of whether or not the specific information is consumed depending on whether or not the game is restricted. The game can be preferably performed.

Feature F10. The special notification means is
A process for performing a first mode effect or a second mode effect by the display control device 81, which can execute a notification suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification. Function to execute) and
The special notification means is a second special notification means (first mode by the display control device 81) capable of executing notification suggesting a specific state of the game after a predetermined number of games after the special notification is executed as the special notification. (Function to execute processing for performing prediction effect and second mode prediction effect),
With
The special notification by the second special notification means is set to have higher reliability as the notification corresponding to the specific state than the special notification by the first special notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of F6 to F9.

According to the above configuration, the current specific state is easier to grasp than the future specific state. By doing so, it becomes possible to identify the transition of the specific state at an earlier stage, and it becomes a preferable configuration for switching between the restricted game and the allowable game.

In addition, "high reliability of notification corresponding to the specific state" means, for example, "high probability of notification corresponding to the specific state" or "content indicated by the special notification is in the specific state". It is easy to be the corresponding notification. " Further, after the "first special notification means" and the "second special notification means" are configured to execute the "special notification" through the "predetermined lottery", the "predetermined lottery by the first special notification means" is performed. The probability of winning a predetermined lottery by the second special notification means is set to be higher than the probability of winning. " In this case, the "first special notification means" side executes the "special notification" through the "predetermined lottery", while the "second special notification means" side does not go through the "predetermined lottery" and executes the "special". It may be configured to execute "notification".

Features F11. Any of the features F6 to F10, wherein the special notification means has a configuration that facilitates execution of the special notification because the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is not the specific result. The game machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, the result of the specific lottery does not become the specific result, and the special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the specific event did not occur. As a result, it becomes easy to perform a game for determining the type of a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to follow the decrease in the player's motivation to play when the specific result is not obtained.

Feature F12. A setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium is set in a plurality of stages, and a setting means (main control device 101) for setting a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by
The case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the said by the special notifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F10, characterized in that the execution rates of special notifications are different.

According to the above configuration, a setting difference is provided in the execution rate of the special notification. By doing so, it is possible to change the increase / decrease rate and increase / decrease mode of the game medium by using the special notification corresponding to the type of the specific state, and it is possible to contribute to the diversification of the game.

Feature F13. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F12, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification in the restricted game.

According to the above configuration, in the restricted game, special notification corresponding to the type of the specific state is performed in the situation where the specific information is not consumed. By doing so, for example, if specific information is provided to the specific lottery by switching from the restricted game to the allowable game, it is acquired in advance due to the regularity of the transition of the specific state and the like. When specific information is provided to a specific lottery, it becomes possible to predict that it is the corresponding information corresponding to a specific state, and it attracts the attention of the player including whether or not the restricted game and the allowable game are switched. It becomes possible.

Feature F14. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F13, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in the allowable game.

According to the above configuration, in the permissible game, special notification corresponding to the type of the specific state is performed in the situation where the specific information is consumed. By doing so, for example, if the specific information is not consumed by switching from the permissible game to the restricted game, the corresponding to the specific state when the pre-acquired specific information is provided to the specific lottery. It is possible to attract the attention of the player, including whether or not the restricted game and the allowable game are switched, such as making it possible to wait for consumption until the information becomes information.

Feature F15. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F14, wherein the special notification means is easier to execute the special notification in the restricted game than in the allowable game.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the restricted game in which the execution of the specific lottery is restricted by using the execution rate of the special notification. In particular, since the execution of the special lottery is restricted in the restricted game, it is considered that the player who wants to receive the special lottery wants to play the game in the allowable game instead of the restricted game as much as possible. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the special notification reminds us of the importance of the game in which the consumption of the specific information acquired in advance is made to wait in the restricted game until it corresponds to the specific state, and the restricted game is made. It is possible to suitably suppress the numbness and switching to the permissible game before the desired specific state is reached even though the game is being played.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F15 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technology that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "Here, the above example and the like, etc. It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features F1 to F15, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
Specific information acquisition means (a function of executing random number acquisition processing in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106 g in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means, and
A specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery as to whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) is caused by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means. (A function to execute the AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101)
Based on the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being the specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means (main control device 101) that causes the specific event. (A function to execute the process to shift to AT mode) and
With
The lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and the corresponding information as the specific information in which the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery is associated with the special result so as to be the specific result is previously provided. It depends on the number of games (the number of games in the advantageous section AG) from the specified start opportunity.
As a game from the predetermined start opportunity, an allowable game (for example, a 3-bet game) in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted, and a restricted game in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. (For example, a 2-bet game) and a game machine characterized in that it can be executed.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws the game and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of this game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since the specific lottery for whether or not to cause a specific event is performed by using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result by the lottery means with the stop result of the orbiting body is performed. Playability that is completely different from slot machines is realized.

Moreover, the correspondence information associated with the special result as the lottery result of the game so that the lottery result of the specific lottery becomes the specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is the number of games from the predetermined start trigger. Even if a specific lottery is performed using the same special result and the same specific information, there are cases where the game is won and cases where the game is not won depending on the number of games from the predetermined start opportunity. You will get it.

In addition, in the above configuration, as a game that can be executed from a predetermined start opportunity, an allowable state in which execution of a specific lottery is permitted and an allowable state in which execution is restricted are set, and the specific information acquired in advance is used as the corresponding information. By providing the specific information to the specific lottery after waiting until the number of games is reached, it is possible to win the specific lottery, and conversely, the specific information acquired in advance becomes the number of games that does not become the corresponding information. By providing the specific information to the specific lottery after waiting until, it is possible to make the specific lottery non-win. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability by using the specific information acquired in advance and the lottery result of the game.

Feature G2. Regardless of the number of games from the predetermined start trigger, the special result is associated with each number of games so that the probability that the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means becomes the specific result is common. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that corresponding information is set.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which correspondence information is set according to the number of games from a predetermined start opportunity, the correspondence information is set so that the winning probability itself of the specific lottery does not differ regardless of the number of games. .. If the winning probabilities of the specific lottery are made different, in a configuration in which the limited game and the allowable game are provided, an event may occur in which the predetermined number of games should be the allowable game regardless of the corresponding information in the first place. You will get it. In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy switching between the restricted game and the permissible game in relation to the specific information acquired in advance more purely.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result is set to be common regardless of the number of games from the predetermined start trigger. ..

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which correspondence information is set according to the number of games from a predetermined start trigger, the probability itself of a special result in each game is set not to be different regardless of the number of games. By doing so, the event that the winning rate of the specific lottery changes due to the difference in the probability of the special result does not occur, so that the restricted game and the permissible game are allowed in relation to the specific information acquired in advance more purely. You can enjoy switching to the game.

Feature G4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode to win a prize, and the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. A mode result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be given a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode wins a prize.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification executing means (mainly) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function to execute push order notification processing by the control device 101) is provided.
An advantageous state in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification executing means and a normal state in which the mode notification cannot be executed by the mode notification executing means are set.
The predetermined start trigger is generated based on the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the specific event is an event that causes the mode notification to be performed by the mode notification executing means.

According to the above configuration, the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means. At the time of winning the mode result, the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by a predetermined notification means. By performing the operation, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. On the premise of such game playability, specific information that is won in a specific lottery that causes a specific event such as causing the mode notification to be performed according to the number of games after shifting to an advantageous state in which the mode notification is possible is provided. Since they are set to be different, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as predicting the occurrence of mode notification in advance based on the relationship between the specific information acquired in advance and the number of games. Moreover, since it is possible to execute a game in which the specific information acquired in advance is consumed and a game in which the specific information is not consumed, whether or not the pre-predicted mode notification is generated changes depending on the subsequent game executed by the player. It becomes a composition. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the fun of playability using the mode notification.

Feature G5. Advantageous state notification means (the first as a section indicator) that shifts to the advantageous state, starts advantageous state notification based on the satisfaction of a predetermined notification condition, and ends the advantageous state notification when the advantageous state ends. Equipped with 8 display segments N8)
The gaming machine according to feature G4, which is set so that the predetermined notification condition may not be satisfied when the predetermined start trigger occurs.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature G4 which is premised on playability by mode notification, the advantageous state notification is performed during the advantageous state, and the advantageous state notification is set to end when the advantageous state ends. Therefore, by confirming the advantageous state notification, the player can clearly grasp whether or not the advantageous state is continued (whether or not the advantageous state is terminated). As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the fairness between the player who can identify the continuation of the advantageous state from other information and the player who does not, and the soundness of the game is improved. Then, when the state shifts to the advantageous state, there are cases where the advantageous state notification is started and cases where it is not, and more specifically, the start of the advantageous state notification waits until a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. Will be done. In this way, in the game playability aiming at the advantageous state, it is suppressed that the transition to the advantageous state is completely understood, and the soundness of the game is improved, but the game playability is not impaired. be able to. Then, by applying such a configuration to the present invention in which the corresponding information for winning the specific lottery is set to be different depending on the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the advantageous state can be obtained. It becomes difficult to understand the number of games after the transition occurs, and as a result, it becomes possible to increase the difficulty level of the predicted game of the corresponding information. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by utilizing the relationship between the specific information acquired in advance and whether or not the specific information is consumed.

Feature G6. A predetermined notification means (auxiliary) is provided as a special notification (first mode effect, second mode effect, first mode prediction effect, second mode prediction effect, and hold display) indicating the relationship between the number of games and the corresponding information. It is equipped with special notification means (a function of executing special notification processing and hold display processing by the display control device 81) that can be executed by the display unit 65).
Any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the execution probability of the special notification by the special notification means is set to change according to the number of games after the predetermined start trigger occurs. The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the correspondence information associated with the special result differs depending on the number of games, and further, in the game property in which the game can be executed with or without the consumption of the specific information, the number of games and the correspondence information Since a special notification indicating the relationship may be performed, the player can determine whether or not the specific information is consumed based on the special notification, and it is possible to improve the winning probability of the specific lottery. Then, since the execution probability of the special notification is set to change according to the number of games from a predetermined start trigger, the winning probability of the specific lottery can be changed by using the special notification. .. This eliminates the need to change the correspondence information and the probability of a special result, so that the configuration is not complicated and the above correspondence information and the probability of a special result cannot be changed. Even with such a game machine, the winning probability of a specific lottery can be changed.

Feature G7. A game number information storage means (various table storage areas 182a by the display control device 81) that stores a plurality of game number information (mode transition table) that sets the relationship between the game number and the corresponding information, and
A function for executing a selection process for selecting one game number information from the game number information stored in the game number information storage means (a function for executing a process for setting a mode transition table by the display control device 81). )When,
With
The specific lottery means has a configuration in which the specific lottery is executed by grasping the corresponding information according to the number of games from the game number information selected by the selection means.
The selection means is characterized in that the selection process is executed based on the number of games after the selection process is executed being a predetermined specific number of games (100 games). The game machine according to any one of G1 to G6.

According to the above configuration, every time the number of games reaches a specific number of games, the number of games information in which the relationship between the number of games and the corresponding information is defined is updated. By doing so, the monotonization of the game using the relationship between the number of games and the corresponding information can be suppressed, and if the number of games information that is not preferable for the player is selected. However, there is a possibility that the unfavorable game number information is updated to other game number information by at least digesting the specific game number, and conversely, when the game number information preferable to the player is selected. However, since the preferred specific game number information can be updated by digesting the specific game number, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature G8. The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein in the allowable game, execution of the selection process by the selection means is permitted, while in the restricted game, execution of the selection process by the selection means is restricted. ..

According to the above configuration, not only the specific lottery but also the update of the number of games information that defines the specific information (corresponding information) used in the specific lottery is restricted in the restricted game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent waste of processing such that only the game number information is updated even though the specific lottery is not performed.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the selection process by the selection means is set to be executed before the specific lottery is performed by the specific lottery means in one game.

According to the above configuration, while avoiding the update of the game number information by the restricted game, when the desired number of games is reached, a specific lottery using the game number information before the update is performed as an allowable game. It can be difficult to do.

Feature G10. Special notification means capable of executing special notification (first mode prediction effect, second mode prediction effect, and hold display) indicating the relationship between the number of games and the corresponding information by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (A function to execute special notification processing and hold display processing by the display control device 81)
A means capable of limiting the execution of the special notification after the number of games after the selection process is executed becomes the specific number of games, at least from the number of the specific games until the selection process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G9, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the above configuration, the correspondence information associated with the special result differs depending on the number of games, and further, in the game property in which the game can be executed with or without the consumption of the specific information, the number of games and the correspondence information Since a special notification indicating the relationship may be performed, the player can determine whether or not the specific information is consumed based on the special notification, and it is possible to improve the winning probability of the specific lottery. Moreover, even though the game number information is updated after that, the special notification is set not to be executed based on the information before the update, so that the executed special notification does not match the actual content. The event will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation for playing due to a decrease in the credibility of the special notification.

The invention described in the above features G1 to G10 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technology that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "Here, the above example and the like, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features G1 to G10, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features H1 to H8, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
Specific information acquisition means (a function of executing random number acquisition processing in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106 g in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined, and
A specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery as to whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) is caused by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means. (A function to execute the AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101)
Based on the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being the specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means (main control device 101) that causes the specific event. (A function to execute the process to shift to AT mode) and
With
A restricted game (for example, a 2-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted is set.
When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information when the predetermined number of the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, while acquiring the specific information. A gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined number of the specific information is stored in the storage means, the specific information is not acquired.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws the game and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of this game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since the specific lottery for whether or not to cause a specific event is performed by using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result by the lottery means with the stop result of the orbiting body is performed. Playability that is completely different from slot machines is realized.

Then, in the above configuration, on the premise that a restricted game in which the specific lottery is restricted may be performed, the specific information acquisition means is a predetermined number which is an upper limit number in the specific information storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the specific information of is not stored, the specific information is acquired, but if the specified number of specific information, which is the upper limit, is stored, the specific information is not acquired. Therefore, the specific lottery is performed. Even if there is a situation where the specific information is not consumed, there is a problem that the specific information is acquired in excess of the upper limit or the specific information is overwritten with a relatively simple configuration. It is possible to prevent it from being caused.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific information acquisition means can acquire the specific information when the acquisition condition is satisfied in the restricted game.

As in the above configuration, if the specific information can be acquired even though the specific information is not consumed in the restricted state, only the acquisition of the specific information can be performed in a situation where the specific information is not stored up to a predetermined number. It will be possible to do it. As a result, for example, when the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is deleted, the specific information can be stored in a relatively simple configuration.

Feature H3. Equipped with bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets on the game.
In the game in which the first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means and the game is started, the specific lottery can be performed by the specific lottery means, while the bet number setting means can be used with the first bet number. The game according to feature H2, wherein a game in which a different second bet number (2 bets) is set is a restricted game in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if only acquisition is to be performed without consuming specific information, the bet number may be set to the second bet number instead of the first bet number, and this is done. Therefore, it is possible to store a predetermined number of specific information at an early stage with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature H4. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is usually set based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. It is equipped with a special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting from the gaming state to the special gaming state and ending the special gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition.
In the game in the normal game state, the specific lottery can be performed by the specific lottery means, while in the game in the special game state, the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. The gaming machine according to the feature H2 or the feature H3.

According to the above configuration, if only acquisition is to be performed without consuming specific information, it is necessary to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state as a so-called bonus state. In general, when the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, information to that effect is output to the hall computer, data display, etc. of the game hall, or an effect for the bonus state is performed. It is considered that the manager of the game hall can easily grasp that the transition to the game state has occurred. By doing so, for example, when undesired specific information is stored, after deleting the specific information by some operation, a transition to a special gaming state is caused in an attempt to further store the specific information. , The manager of the game hall can easily identify that the act is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally acquire specific information.

Feature H5. The game according to any one of features H2 to H4, wherein when a predetermined operation (operation of the reset switch 72) is performed, the specific information stored by the specific information storage means is erased. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means may be deleted when a predetermined operation is performed. By applying the configuration of the feature H2 to such a game machine, it becomes possible to store specific information and then use it for a normal game after erasing the structure.

It should be noted that the "predetermined operation" is defined as "the operation of the operating means provided at a position where the operation can be performed by performing the predetermined unlocking operation" so that the player can freely erase the specific information. It is clarified that it will not be possible.

Feature H6. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode to win a prize, and the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. A mode result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be given a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode wins a prize.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification executing means (mainly) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function to execute push order notification processing by the control device 101) is provided.
An advantageous state in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification executing means and a normal state in which the mode notification cannot be executed by the mode notification executing means are set.
Based on the end of the advantageous state, a means capable of erasing the specific information stored in the specific information storage means (a function of executing an initialization process of information for an advantageous section by the main control device 101). ), The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5.

According to the above configuration, the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means. At the time of winning the mode result, the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by a predetermined notification means. By performing the operation, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. On the premise of such playability, when the advantageous state in which the mode notification is possible ends, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is deleted, so that the specific information is acquired in one advantageous state. Since the specific information is not carried over across the advantageous states, the independence of each advantageous state is guaranteed. By applying the configuration of feature H2 to such a game machine, it becomes possible to reacquire specific information in a normal state where execution of a specific lottery may be restricted, and the state shifts to an advantageous state again. At that time, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not being able to receive the specific lottery because the specific information is not accumulated.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the game in the normal state is included in a restricted game in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific information is not consumed in the normal state and is only acquired.

Feature H8. A means for acquiring the specific information to be used for the current specific lottery among the specific information stored in the specific information storage means based on the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery means. (A function to execute a process of shifting the AT counter to the execution area AE in the random number shift process by the main control device 101).
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the acquisition condition is satisfied after the specific information is acquired by the lottery acquisition means.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that in each game, the specific information is consumed by being provided to the specific lottery to create a vacancy in the specific information storage means, and then the specific information is acquired. As a result, basically, at the end of each game, the maximum number of specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, and if the specific information is not consumed in the restricted game, the specific information is not acquired. Is also clarified.

The invention described in the above features H1 to H8 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technology that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "Here, the above example and the like, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features H1 to H8, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A game start means (a function of executing the processes of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) to start the game based on the start operation by the player, and
A game ending means (a function of executing the processes of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) to end the game based on the ending operation by the player, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the start operation, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the end operation is an operation corresponding to the predetermined result, the privilege giving means (payment determination by the main control device 101) capable of giving the privilege corresponding to the predetermined result. Function to execute processing) and
It is a game machine equipped with
Using the lottery result by the lottery means, the specific lottery means (processing for AT lottery by the main control device 101) capable of executing the specific lottery as to whether or not to cause a specific event (shift to the AT mode) advantageous to the player Function to execute) and
When the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means (the main control device 101 shifts to the AT mode) that causes the specific event is caused. (Ability to execute processing for) and
In a game machine equipped with
The specific lottery means executes the specific lottery by using the lottery result by the lottery means and predetermined first information (mode transition table, AT counter) and second information (advantageous section game number AG). It is a composition,
In the game, the first information updating means (a function of executing the process for shifting to the lottery mode by the main control device 101 and the process for shifting random numbers) and the first information updating means for updating the first information.
A second information updating means (a function of executing the section display second processing by the main control device 101) that updates the second information at the time of the game, and
With
A first game (3-bet game) in which the update of the first information by the first information updating means is permitted, and a second game (2-bet game) in which the update of the first information is restricted are defined. And
A gaming machine characterized in that updating of the second information by the second information updating means is permitted in both the first game and the second game.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, the game is ended based on the end operation, and the end operation corresponds to the lottery result. In a game machine such as a so-called slot machine, in which a privilege is given, a specific lottery may be performed using the lottery result of the game to determine whether or not a specific event advantageous to the player is caused. Since a specific event will occur when the lottery is won, the interest of the game can be improved by paying attention not only to the lottery result of each game but also to the lottery result of the specific lottery.

In this case, the specific lottery means for performing the specific lottery is configured to perform the specific lottery using not only the lottery result of each game but also the first information and the second information, but the update of the first information is permitted. While there is a first game to be played and a second game in which updating is restricted, the second information is updated in both the first game and the second game. Therefore, if the first game is performed, the specific lottery is always performed using the updated first information and the second information, whereas if the second game is performed, the first information is obtained. Although the updated information is used, the second information that is not updated is used. By doing so, for example, if the second information is preferable to the player, it is possible to play the game while avoiding the update of the second information in the second game. If the 2 information is not preferable to the player, it is possible to update the second information in the first game. That is, a combination of both information is provided so that both the first information and the second information can be restricted or allowed to be updated as compared with the case where both the first information and the second information are updated every game. Difficulty in making it favorable to the player is dramatically reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability using the specific lottery.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the player can select which game to play, the first game or the second game.

According to the above configuration, the player can freely select between the first game in which the first information is updated and the second game in which the first information is not updated. Active participation of players is encouraged, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature I3. It is characterized by being provided with a special notification means (a function of executing a special notification process or a hold display process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification corresponding to the first information by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the first information by the special notification, and determines whether the first game or the second game should be performed according to the first information. It is also possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the above-mentioned game in which the relationship between the first information and the second information or the first game and the second game is applied to the specific lottery.

Feature I4. In the first game, execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted, while in the second game, execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

According to the above configuration, in order to receive the specific lottery, it is necessary to play at least in the first game. In this case, in the second game, when the update of the first information side is restricted and only the second information side is updated, the combination of the first information and the second information is preferable for the player. That is, when the second game is being performed, it is highly likely that the combination of the first information and the second information is not yet preferable for the player. .. Therefore, as in the above configuration, in the second game, the specific lottery itself is also restricted, so that unnecessary execution of the specific lottery can be avoided. For example, the specific lottery for the first information and the second information can be avoided. In a configuration that requires new first information and second information by being provided to, a specific lottery will be held even though the combination is being optimized. Therefore, the first information and the second information before the optimization are used, and the inconvenience that the optimization is required again does not occur.

Feature I5. The first information updating means is described in accordance with a predetermined first rule (the mode corresponding to the mode transition table is switched and the AT counter is shifted each time the game is digested) each time the game is played. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that the first information is updated.

According to the above configuration, if the player understands the first rule, it is possible to predict the updated first information before updating the first information. By doing so, even in a situation where the update of the first information is restricted in the second game, it is possible to predict the first information to be updated in the case of the first game.

Feature I6. The specific lottery means corresponds to specific information derived from the relationship between the first information and the second information (the first mode and the second mode in the first embodiment, and the lottery mode in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that the specific lottery is executed by using the winning value of the AT counter) and the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, in the specific lottery, the second information side always uses the specific information derived from the relationship between the first information and the second information, instead of simply using the first information and the second information. The significance of being updated is clarified.

The invention described in the above features I1 to I6 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and benefits are given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the slot machine starts in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "when the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features I1 to I6, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H8 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature I group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature I group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the game machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol sequence in the final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a game machine, 32 ... Reel as a circuit board, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary effect unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 ... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (8)

Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies,
A starting operation means for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means that can grant a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result,
It is a game machine equipped with
Specific information acquisition means for acquiring specific information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
A specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means, and a specific information storage means.
A specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery as to whether or not a specific event is caused by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means.
Based on the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being the specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means for causing the specific event and the specific execution means.
With
The lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and the corresponding information as the specific information in which the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery is associated with the special result is different. 1 specific state and 2 specific state are set,
The state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state is a limitation in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted and the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set so that it can occur in any of the games. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a switching operation means capable of switching between the allowable game and the restricted game based on the operation of the player. The game according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the specific notification means capable of executing the specific notification about the specific information stored in the specific information storage means by a predetermined notification means is provided. Machine. The specific notification is updated based on the acquisition of the specific information by the specific information acquisition means, and the specific information stored by the specific information storage means is used for the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising an updating means capable of updating the specific notification based on the above. The one according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the special notification means capable of executing the special notification corresponding to the first specific state or the second specific state by a predetermined notification means is provided. Game machine. The game according to claim 5, wherein the special notification means includes a first special notification means capable of executing a notification suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification. Machine. The special notification means is provided with a second special notification means capable of executing notification suggesting a specific state of the game after a predetermined number of games after the special notification is executed as the special notification. The gaming machine according to claim 5 or 6. The special notification means is
A first special notification means capable of executing a notification suggesting a specific state of a game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification, and
The special notification means includes a second special notification means capable of executing notification suggesting a specific state of the game after a predetermined number of games after the special notification is executed as the special notification.
With
The special notification by the second special notification means is set to have higher reliability as the notification corresponding to the specific state than the special notification by the first special notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 5 to 7.

Images